JP2019068975A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase amusement to a performance device.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when a result of the game is a special result comprises: a performance device (upper movable member 230) which is composed of a plurality of members and executes a performance related to the game with a predetermined operation; and performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling the performance device. The performance control means, before operation of the performance device, can execute an assembly performance for displaying a series of performances imitating completion of the performance device with the plurality of members, and predetermined information (e.g. probability setting value) can be suggested by a performance mode of the assembly performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generating a special gaming state for providing a player with a gaming value when a result of the game is a special result.

  A display device capable of executing effect display on a display unit based on winning of a game ball in a start winning area provided on a game board, a effect device operable in relation to the progress of the effect display, and the effect device A gaming machine comprising: control means for controlling the gaming machine, wherein the presentation device includes a presentation combination unit which includes a first movable combination unit and a second movable combination unit and is capable of executing a presentation operation. It is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-107433, A

In the conventional gaming machine, for example, it was not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the rendering device, such as not being aware of the operation of the rendering device.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a rendering device.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a result of the game is a special result,
An effect device configured by a plurality of members and performing effects related to a game by executing a predetermined operation;
And an effect control unit capable of controlling the effect device.
The effect control means can execute an assembly effect displaying a series of effects simulating the completion of the effect device by the plurality of members before the operation of the effect device.
It is characterized in that predetermined information can be suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the rendering device.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the definite condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the shift judging processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure which shows an example of the disassembled perspective view of a presentation button. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a figure explaining operation promotion presentation. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable decoration unit in a 2nd embodiment, and (a) A figure showing the state where the 1st upper movable member operated, (b) The state where the 2nd upper movable member operated FIG. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the light emission decoration part in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: The figure which shows a covering state (a) and (b), (c) and a figure which shows a (d) retracted state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the 1st upper movable member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st upper movable member in a 2nd embodiment, and is a figure which omitted a (a) luminescence decoration part, and a figure showing a (b) luminescence decoration part. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the light emission unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining a character article assembly production. It is a figure explaining a character article assembly production.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower plate (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls which are paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation handle 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball striking device is fed from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40, there is provided a panel effect device 44 forming a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special view variation display game by the movable effect member operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  In the lower left portion of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying the fourth symbol to execute the decorative special view variable display game separately from the decorative special view variable display game displayed on the display device 41, and displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub information display device 90 is configured by a single light emitting unit forming a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. A second sub formed of a sub game display portion 91 and a single light emitting portion forming a sub game display portion for displaying a fourth pattern for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special view variation display game by two light emission units And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to do.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special view variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner, and a display indicating the result are extinguished, blinked, or lit of the light emitting unit Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 have the numbers of the first start storage (special figure 1 suspension) and the second start storage (special figure 2 suspension) turned off of the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking or lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 without occupying the display region of the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operation of the board effect device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (common view start gate, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the common view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure change display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be possible to win rather than the open state.
In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 for a first special figure fluctuation display game including a seven-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like and a second special figure The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display section 53 for the common drawing fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamps (common drawing indicator), and the same LED lamp And storage display portions 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game configured as described above.
In addition, a first gaming state display unit (a first gaming state indicator, a right strike notification unit) 57 that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state in which the right strike is more advantageous than the left strike is available. The second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 58 that lights up when a status occurs and reports the occurrence of a time saving condition, and the probability of a big hit when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with a high probability status 3rd game state indicator (3rd game state indicator, probability state indicator) 59 which indicates that it is, round indicator 60 which indicates the number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing of special fluctuation winning device 38) Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also blinked to drive fluctuation. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the game result is “off”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the game result is “hit”, the hit result mode (special result mode) is not The game result is displayed with the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode turned on.

  The common indicator 53 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the common drawing reservation display 56 displays the number of starting memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing starting gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 53 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 reserve display 54 has a plurality of LEDs, including the number of undivided balls (number of start memories = number of reserve) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 serving as the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. Displayed by turning off, blinking or lighting. The special figure 2 reserve display 55 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of start memories (= number of reserve) of the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52. Displayed by blinking or lighting.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the light if the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game (normally hit) If the player is in a game state in which the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal game state where the time reduction state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated) If the time saving condition is occurring (during the fluctuation time shortening function operation), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp if the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when not in the special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result in the special game state. Turn on the light. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding data stored even when the game control apparatus 100 is in the power-off state. Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124.

  Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Furthermore, setting value change serving as detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value to be a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned to the third input port 124 Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

  The setting key switch 152 is for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit that constitutes the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit has a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the on state when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and in a state of not being turned to the second position. It will be off if there is any.

  The setting value change switch 151 is for detecting an operation of a setting value change button serving as a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when not pressed.

  By operating these operation units, it is possible to select the probability setting value to which the probability value to be the special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six of setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared as probability setting values. Probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6 It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

  When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the setting key operation unit setting key is turned to the second position, and the probability setting value is obtained by turning on the power of the gaming machine. The probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operating unit is In the case of turning to the second position, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 but the probability setting value can not be changed.

  The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, as long as the display mode can recognize the probability setting value. In addition, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and information on the probability setting value may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the character / object ratio. In this case, while operating on the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), information on the probability setting value is displayed, and in the other cases, the calculated base value and item ratio Give priority to the display.

  In the present embodiment, a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153 and the like are provided in the game control apparatus 100, and the probability value used by the game control apparatus 100 for lottery of the special view fluctuation display game The probability setting value to which is assigned is a setting means that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control apparatus 100. That is, setting means may be provided separately from the game control apparatus 100. In this case, an operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control apparatus 100 and the probability setting value may be changed by the game control apparatus 100. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control apparatus 100.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that gaming balls are stored in the lower plate 23 more than a predetermined amount (full)), Touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based on the detection at the out switch detecting all the game balls which have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game. The first input port 122 is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 is provided via the data bus 140 takes in the Ku signal).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of In addition, the second output port 134 outputs display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the bonus ratio.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 for displaying the selected probability setting value.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 , The fifth for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and causing the state display device 160 to display Driver 138e is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. 4.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the provided panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable character that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and the like, and forms a movable effect device which performs game effects including a special view change display game A presentation device may be provided, and a frame presentation movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame presentation device.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled according to FIG. 3), it is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 56 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 53 provided on the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the ordinary drawing display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 53 according to the type of hit. The stop display is performed, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 53.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the number of stored start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and the special view start store is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. In addition, it is displayed also on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. The determined big hit determination random number value is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special view change display game on the display device 41 (the change display device). A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which a symbol etc. is variably displayed is displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special view variable display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the time saving state (specific gaming state, common drawing high probability state, second operation state) as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state It has become. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operation state of the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is controlled in any one of the first operation state and the second operation state in which winning is easier than the first operation state. .

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, and the special view change display game can be executed, the second special view change display game is It is to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a, an out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game, has a coil for detecting magnetism, and utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Noncontact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) for detecting Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  A signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and a signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 receives the third waiting time before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) can be grasped. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed It becomes. In addition, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing.

  By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a bothersome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the initialization operation performed at the time of power on can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and the data bus (for example, 2 times) (step S8) Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means at the time of power on is valid. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change state (step S21). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

  If it is in the probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off while the probability setting value is changing, and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is again set. The value is changed. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S21; N), it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state from the state of the third input port 124 read previously (step S22).

  In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for probability setting values, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for variation pattern random numbers, an area for game control, and an area for state display are set in order from the top. In the area for probability setting value, there is a probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value currently set, and a working area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value. Be done. The work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value random number, a small hit symbol initial value random number, a hit initial value random number, and a hit symbol initial value random number which are updated as needed are stored. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 updated as needed are stored in the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers. Further, in the area for game control, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying a state, a work area in which information necessary for displaying a base value, a feature ratio, and the like is stored, and a stack area are set.

  The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected at the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game and the number of payouts based on the winnings in the winning area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. In addition, the item ratio is the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present time The percentage (the so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (the number of balls earned by character) obtained by winning the big winning opening in the middle) is the information necessary to display the character ratio For example, includes information on the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls), and information on the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character).

  The RAM clear top address 2 is the top address of the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the random value random number are processed by clearing the RAM with this address set. The game control area is cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Also, the RAM clear top address 1 described later is the top address of the area for probability setting value, and the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is obtained by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. The area for the area, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (the work area and the stack area) are cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3 described later is the top address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing processing to clear the RAM with this address set. Become.

  The status display area is judged to be correct in status display edit output processing in timer interrupt processing to be described later, and is initialized if it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 set in the case is set, the state display area may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

  In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and later-described step S57, the checksum is calculated for only the work area for game control. Note that one or more of the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for variation pattern random number, the area for game control, and the area for state display may be used. When a plurality of areas are targeted, the checksums of the respective areas may be calculated individually, and the legitimacy may be determined individually, or the checksums of the respective areas may be summed and the legitimacy It may be determined collectively.

  If the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and performs processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. If the setting key switch is not on (step S23; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the third input port 124 read in advance Then, it is determined whether or not the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S24).

  When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed. If the setting value change switch is on (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, and initialization of the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for gaming control Do the processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The initialization means to initialize the

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25 Then, the process of initializing all RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for probability setting value and the RAM area for state display are initialized only when the RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

  First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is judged from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). If the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read in advance (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform processing of initializing the RAM and processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state. As described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, initial value random number is used. The area of the variable pattern random number area and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to save the initial value. The state display area may also be initialized here.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S27; N) or if the body frame is not open (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access (step S29), stop the control, and wait for the power of the gaming machine to shut off. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the setting change instruction command. The notification that prompts the user to change the probability setting value is performed, for example, by outputting voices from the speakers 19a and 19b. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  In this case, the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off, and then the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position with the front frame 12 opened. If the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. The switch is determined to be on (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state. When the control is stopped by shifting to step S29, the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off and then the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not rotated to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state can not be shifted to the probability setting value change state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

  In addition, although it is made to alert | report by transmitting setting change instruction | command command to the production control apparatus 300 in step S28, you may make it the game control apparatus 100 alert | report. For example, notification may be performed on the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control apparatus 100, and a display not used as identification information is performed on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52. It is also possible to provide a display for reporting an abnormality.

  In step S30 of FIG. 6 as processing when the power is restored normally from the power failure, the initial value upon power failure restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

  Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S31; N), the process skips steps S32 and S33 and shifts to step S34. If the special drawing is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S33).

  And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S34), step S45 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the resumed game state. When the special view variation display game interrupted due to the power supply interruption is resumed with the restart of control, the recovery screen command forming the recovery information is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in this case, the information on the result of the special view fluctuation display game to be resumed is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is shut off while waiting for customers and the control is resumed in the waiting for customers state due to restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when the special gaming state interrupted by the power-off is to be resumed along with the resumption of control, the special gaming state resume command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

  Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35) to initialize the process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value to a state where the probability setting value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, an area for initial value random numbers, an area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be cleared.

  On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, an area for probability setting value, an area for initial value random number, and an area for fluctuation pattern random number And the game control area (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The state display area may also be initialized here.

  Further, the area to be initialized is an area where it is desired to set a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, for example, an area related to setting of a customer waiting demo area and an effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the game arcade even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a wrongdoing. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when all of the RAM area is initialized.

  Thereafter, a probability setting value change in progress flag is set as processing for changing the probability setting value to a probability setting value change state (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, information of the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 can be displayed.

  Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the operation probability setting value area (step S39), and the command under the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40) , Shift to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command under probability setting change. A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is provided by the operation, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, the timer may be set to output the security signal for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the initialization of the RAM has not been performed yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

  Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, at step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42). The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be stored (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the RAM area (the work area and the stack area) for game control are cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting value change button).

  Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, RAM initial A plurality of commands such as an activation command (a command for displaying a notification of RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) while transmitting a customer waiting demo screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  In step S45, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S45, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S46). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 updated). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hitting symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the small hitting stop design of the game. In addition, "the initial value random value per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit for the common pattern variation display game, and "the initial value random symbol per pattern" is a stop symbol for the common pattern variation display game A random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing. In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. Also, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

  Also, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and checking is set (step S50). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step S49 above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination (step S51) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S53) A process (step S54) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S55), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S56). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) capable of external operation, and an initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time. It becomes.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process may return to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the control of the game may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made not based on the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6, but on the basis of the state of the third input port 124 at the present time. Furthermore, when the state in which the processes in steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a predetermined time, the process may move to step S29 to wait for the interruption of the power.

  Furthermore, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state where the probability setting value can be changed is that the main frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 may not be a condition. In addition, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be conditions, or the opening of the glass frame 15 may be only.

  Further, without providing the setting key switch, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is in the on state. That is, without performing the processes of steps S22 and S23, the process may move to step S35 of FIG. 6 when the setting value change switch is on at step S24 (step S24; Y). In this case, although the process of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability setting value changing state only on the condition that the setting value changing switch is on as described above, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Storage means (RAM 111 C) which comprises setting means (gaming control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the control means is capable of holding stored contents even when the power is shut off ), The validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the probability setting value is selected. And an initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit, and the validity determination unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid. When it is determined that the notification has been made, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

  The control means is configured to be able to select the probability setting value when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means by the validity determination means is If it is determined that the notification is not valid, the notification to prompt the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, the control means is configured to stop the control of the game and wait for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means are provided. When it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means On the basis of the reception of the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means continues to notify the user to select the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to urge recovery to the normal state and prevent the gaming machine from remaining in the state where the probability setting value is not set by the initialization.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in the gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state for giving the player the gaming value The first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value) are control means (game control apparatus 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned. A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control unit can hold stored contents even when the power is shut off If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, recovery is performed based on the information stored and held in the storage unit, and the power is turned off. At the same time, when the first operation unit is operated, it is in a changeable state that allows the probability setting value to be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, storage is performed. It means that the means has been initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game arcade can be improved. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, which can reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

  In addition, the control means includes legitimacy determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores the information in the storage means. If it is determined that the information being processed is not valid and the first operation unit has not been operated, a notification prompting initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

  Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state enabling change of the probability setting value by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. And the first operation unit is operated when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is not valid by the validity determination unit and the first operation unit is not operated. The notification for prompting the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge return to a normal state.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, random number update processing 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, which is the target of the initial value random number update processing (step S105) First, random number update processing 2 (step S106) is performed to update the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 2. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are opened.

  Next, a probability setting value change process (step S108) is performed to perform processing regarding change and confirmation of the probability setting value, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S109). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 as a process related to the progression of the game. A special drawing game process (step S112) for performing a process related to a figure variation display game and a common drawing game process (step S113) for performing a process related to a common drawing variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed.

  If the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected, the payout command transmission processing (step S111), the special figure game processing (step S112), and the common-play game processing (step S113) are not performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed to pay out the winning balls. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the random number updating process 1 (step S105) or the random number updating process 2 (step S106) is not performed in the probability setting value change state, and the random number update is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. You may Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step S114) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S114) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S117) of setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The state display editing and output process is performed to calculate the and the like (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the common control solenoid 37c are synthesized and output (step S142).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S146).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S149), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 ", data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S150), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

  Next, off output data of probability setting value display is set as display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether a probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

  If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output of the probability setting value display The data is output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display unit 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability setting value display (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S156). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S157).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S158). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S159). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S160).

  Next, test signal output data of the probability setting value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded as test signal output data from the probability setting value display data area. That is, for the information on the probability setting value among the test signals to the test sampling device, the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is. As a result, the processing is simplified, and the information of the probability setting value does not change, and accurate information can be output. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

  Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and when it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is on (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Thereafter, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus (step S164), and the output processing is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the game ball to the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means controls the payout ball command based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control to transmit to the means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control device. Payment The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. It will be like that.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means (game control device 100) The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) which can specify the presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command which instructs the payout control of the game ball for every prize ball number, the state signal can start the payout control , And when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout control means It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the payout control can be started before specification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a winning ball command is issued based on the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a game, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command sent from the game control means; The control means is configured to control the payout ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) to be sent to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined prize area. Of the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) to output to the unit, and the external information output means determines whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control or not The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the winning device 38), and one winning ball command is paid out when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The game ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the winnings in units of one winning on a predetermined winning area, and can play the game on the predetermined winning area. Ball winning The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means is configured to perform predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes ten, and the payout control device 200 has ten game balls paid out. The main prize ball signal is output each time
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S299). If the probability setting value change state is in effect, it can be determined because the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed.

  When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the process after step S301 is performed as a process regarding progress of a game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is determined that the game can not be progressed without performing the processing relating to the winning.

  In the probability setting value change state or in the probability setting value confirmation mode, monitoring of fraud and prizes of the special variation winning device 38, monitoring of fraud and prizes of the normally moving prize device 37, and a prize winning hole which can always be prized It is not necessary to monitor the winnings of the above, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the fraud monitoring of the special variation winning device 38 or the normal variation winning device 37 may be performed. Also, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

  In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large despite the opening. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the prize opening and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning is achieved despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open. An illegal and prize monitoring process (step S304) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the mouth and to detect a normal prize.

  Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Puden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an unfair winning in the Fuden despite the fact that it is not open At the same time, a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed to detect a normal prize. Then, the prize hole monitor table of the prize hole switch (for example, the starting hole 1 switch 36a and the prize hole switch 35a of the general prize hole 35) which can always be prized is prepared (step S307) A process (step S308) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output when a connector of the switch is disconnected or the like. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

Probability setting value change processing
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value changing state is set (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value changing state (step S401; N), a process of enabling confirmation of the probability setting value The probability setting value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is ended.

  If the probability setting value change state is determined (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 . If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, information on the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output process (see FIG. 8). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which a probability setting value to be used in the game is newly set by performing a determination operation described later, and in this case, a probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

  Then, in the determination whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

  In addition, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0-5. The values of 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. The probability setting value to be selected changes sequentially. When the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by 1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the determination operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it as numbers other than this.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). Thus, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and blank display is performed without displaying anything as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button. Will be displayed. By doing this, it can be understood that the display has been updated.

  Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be used. For example, when displaying with probability setting value by 1 to 6 numbers, display other than this number may be specified display. That is, the specific display may not be used as the display of the probability setting value. In addition, when displaying the display of the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the probability setting value after updating may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the elapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode to blink, a display mode in which the flickering cycle is different from when it is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not specific .

  Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, and the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 46, the panel effect device 44 The specific notification which is the notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. That is, specific notification may be performed in combination with or in place of the specific display. Further, the display similar to the probability setting value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special view 1 display 51, and the special view 2 display.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the touch of the human body on the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is a touch. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change processing is ended. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). Thereby, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. That is, it is a determination operation of determining the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be used as the confirmation operation, or an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

  Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S415), a command of probability setting value change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S416), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. . In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the probability setting value has been changed is performed by the operation, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, or the like.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not turned off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is ended. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417). The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

  As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. In addition, setting of a timer for outputting a security signal is also performed. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, and the area for the state display are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work such as the work probability set value area for temporarily storing information of the probability set value selected in the probability set value change state and various flags in the area for the probability set value is cleared. Ru. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is ended. In addition, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the probability setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) Step S421) The processing proceeds to step S48 of the main processing shown in FIG. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display of the panel effect device 44 based on receiving the command of probability setting value change. The notification that the change of the probability setting value has ended is performed by the operation, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, model designation command, special figure 1 pending number command, special figure 2 pending number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of selected probability setting value, probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command to end change (displaying a customer waiting demo screen, and a command for notifying of the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command of termination of probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting probability setting value information that is information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, performing an effect according to the probability setting value, or providing a game effect according to the probability setting value It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of probability setting values. And a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) for displaying information of the selected probability setting value, and the setting unit is based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated in response to the selection operation of the probability setting value, the specific display is performed over a predetermined period from the update. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  Further, the setting means displays a display not used as a display of the information of the probability setting value as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

  In addition, the setting means displays the updated information in a manner different from that after the elapse of the predetermined period over the predetermined period as the specific display. Therefore, it can be made easy to understand that the display has been updated, and the selected probability setting value can be clearly grasped.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability setting value changing process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value can not be changed but the probability setting value currently being set can be confirmed. In this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined because the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set.

  If the mode is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (step S433).

  During the game is during the execution of the special figure change display game, during the execution of the common view change display game, during the special game state or during the hit state of the common view. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. That is, when in the game, it does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. In this case, information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 indicating that it is not possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode since the game is being played, and notification may be made to that effect.

  The conditions for determining that the game is in progress are not limited to those described above. The special figure variation display game may be executed, the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special gaming state, or one or more states selected from among the hitting state of the general figure as a condition, for example, the special figure A game may be in progress if any of the variation display game is being executed or in the special game state. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the on state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. If the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), and the command under confirmation of the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438). finish. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output over a predetermined time as external information. Further, in the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the panel effect based on reception of the command under probability setting value confirmation. By the operation of the device 44, the output of voices by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like, notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is provided.

  On the other hand, when in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value confirmation mode continues.

  If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In the effect control device 300, the notification that the confirmation of the probability setting value is in progress is ended based on the reception of the command of the probability setting value confirmation end.

  That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position in a state where the power is turned on, and is ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the special symbol variation by the special view 1 display 51 is performed . And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A22) concerning the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed , The special figure game processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 An effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the winning absence information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37). The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.

  In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of hard random number acquisition processing is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and starts the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special view starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting opening 36). (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the special map reservation information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and at step A140 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special view starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends.

  The big hit determination process in step A 157 and the small hit determination process in step A 159 are the same as the processes shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process. That is, the determination according to the set probability setting value is performed. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 reservation number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, if it is determined that the special drawing 1 reservation number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A309) A309; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special processing game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A316), and the special view ordinary processing is ended. That is, when it is possible to start the special view variation display game but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started at step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” at step A301 (step A301; N), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step A302). Next, an effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.
If the special drawing 1 holding number is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decoration special drawing holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is prepared (step A306). Next, a rendering command setting process (step A307) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321). In order to determine whether the special figure variation display game is a big hit, shift information and big hit information is set in the big hit flag 1 to determine whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit or not A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set the shift information and the small hit information to the small hit flag of.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed.

Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A333). Next, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" associated with the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area Here, 100 ms is set (step A353). Then, an initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

  When selecting a variation pattern of the special view variation display game in the special view 1 variation start process or the special view 2 variation start process described above, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit determination value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit determination value in the high probability state and the upper limit determination value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are respectively defined. Here, the corresponding table is set in accordance with the currently set probability setting value. Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the jackpot determination can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is made different according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be put together to form a judgment value table.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Note that the disconnection in step A 389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the small hit determination processing later. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A384). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A387) . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A 381 described above.

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A 322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process .

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the small hitting determination process, first, a small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hitting upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value at the same probability setting value do not overlap. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value of different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

  Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), the judgment result is set as a deviation (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step A403).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a gap is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

  As in the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit determination value in the big hit determination and the small hit upper limit determination value in the small hit determination may be collectively defined in a determination value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, although the value of the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, the small hitting lower limit judgment value may be made different depending on the probability setting value, and in this case, according to the probability setting value The small hit lower limit judgment value is selected.

  In addition, in the process of setting the upper limit setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), the probability setting value referred to is indicated. If the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, the setting may be performed as a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or an abnormality occurs. The game may be stopped and an error may be notified. Also, although the probability setting value is referred to for each determination of the big hit and each determination of the small hit, when setting the probability setting value in the probability setting value change state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value Alternatively, processing for setting the small hitting upper limit judgment value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when judging the big hit or judging the small hit.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A601), and rendering command setting A process is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and displays the result as a stop.

  Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms as the display time regardless of whether the stop design pattern is a removal design pattern, a big hit design pattern or a small hit design pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop design pattern. . That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Subsequently, the processing number "2" according to the processing during the special figure display is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A608) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 609). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A610) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611) The special figure changing process ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717). The fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722) The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 724) is performed to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, and the special view display processing is terminated. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high by performing high probability fluctuation number update processing (step A 726) for updating the value of (the high probability fluctuation number) and presentation mode information check processing (step A 727) related to setting of the rendering mode. It is determined whether it is a probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in high probability state. High probability change count update processing (step A 743) for updating the value of the area (high probability change count), presentation mode information check processing regarding setting of presentation mode (step A 744), switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to presentation mode number A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A746). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A746; N), "0" relating to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A749) The special figure game process number area saves the process number (step A750) and clears the variation symbol determination flag area (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 752), and the special view display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is made. After performing the process (step A 748), the process proceeds to step A 749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the regular drawing game process number is "3" in step B7, then the regular processing per medium drawing or the setting of information necessary for performing the routine charge residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control processing related to the control of the fluctuation of the ordinary design by the common drawing display 53 (step B15) is performed, and the common drawing game processing is finished.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary drawing routine, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets "0" relating to the ordinary drawing routine processing as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the ordinary drawing game processing number area (step B323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

  In addition, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) Clear the loaded area, that is, the per random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (step B302), and there is a probability that it will be a hit result in the common drawing variation display game It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the normal probability (that is, the common map low probability), that is, in the short time state (step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the random number is greater than or equal to step B304 or B305. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (step B307).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the misplacement information (step B308), set the disappointing stop symbol number (step B309), save the disappointing symbol information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B310), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”. Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.
Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the popular game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B 321) is performed to shift to the common drawing variation processing, and the common drawing routine processing is ended. That is, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the common view change display game as the variable display game (based on the common view start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball in the common view start gate 34 (inflow area). I
In the case of this embodiment, in step B320, 500 ms is set with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms is set with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms is set with a probability of 16/256. .

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" for the general drawing display processing (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area. (Step B402). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing display 53 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B403). Save the signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation in progress signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B404), and set the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped to the common drawing fluctuation control flag area After saving (step B405), the general drawing variation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the processing for displaying the generic drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. Then (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the ordinary processing of the drawing (step B 515), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 Or “5”) and save it in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the common drawing hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, a general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

  Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the common drawing per process (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B509). After that, the test signal is a signal relating to the start of hitting the common drawing variation display game (for example, the signal during medium symbol 1 is normally ON) and a signal regarding the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motor vehicle 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common power solenoid, the on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area (step B511).

  Furthermore, the information of the common charge count number area which stores the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is cleared (step B 512), the common power which memorizes the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 in the common electric power fraud monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing of the common map display is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer in the common drawing (step B603) A branch process is performed according to the value before +1 updating in B603 (step B604).
If the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the processing in the common drawing in the step B603 is not updated by +1, and the processing in the common drawing is not performed. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “5”, the process proceeds to step B 605 and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus corresponding to the control pointer is operated to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 The wait time after blocking 37 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the common electric solenoid output data area to turn off the common electric solenoid 37c (step B606). Ends processing during each drawing.

  When the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 607 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the on-data in the common power solenoid output data area (step B608) in order to save the common power open time, which is the open time, in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B607) and turn on the common power solenoid 37c. End the process during the popular map.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609, where it is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The general power release time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B610). End the process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform generalization residual ball processing, so the processing number Is set as "4" (step B611). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B612), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B613). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37 c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B 614), and the processing of the common drawing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, 300 ms is used as a wait time, in step B607, 1700 ms as a power open time, in step B609 as 2600 ms as power open time, in step B613. Save 600 ms as the normal charge residual ball processing time.
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the stop symbol display shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "1700 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "0" per blow. Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then 300 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

  Further, if the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 2”, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the general drawing display processing, "2600 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, the normal charge release time is "2600 ms", and the normal charge is released for 2600 ms, and then the weight of 300 ms is waited because the control pointer is "5". Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 2600msec, and then the control pointer is updated to "7" during the normal drawing, and then 600msec. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N), and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S817), save the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and shift to the process of step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no generation of general electricity fraud (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the special winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether the switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch abnormality is not occurring (step S815; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 820) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 821). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S823).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step In step S824, the external information editing process ends.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 32 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 The decoration control process to be performed (step C18) and the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the panel effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) that has not been executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, to perform the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  Further, with regard to commands relating to power on and commands relating to probability setting values, corresponding processing is performed in single-shot system command processing. The commands related to power on include a command upon power failure recovery and a command upon RAM initialization. The commands relating to the probability setting value include the commands of probability setting change, probability setting change end, probability setting change end, probability setting value confirmation, and probability setting value confirmation end during the probability setting change.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode is made, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of the above, the state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized along with the end of the probability setting value change state, any of the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special game variation display game is being executed, the special game condition is in progress, or the common figure is hit. It may be a condition that it does not fall under either. In addition, it may be a condition that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the state may not be shifted to the probability setting value change state.

  Although the RAM 111C is initialized upon termination of the probability setting value change state, the RAM 111C may not be initialized except when it is determined that the data of the RAM 111C is abnormal.

  In addition, although probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different from each other, the same probability value may be allocated to different probability setting values. FIG. 35 (a) shows the probability setting value in the present embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is designed to take a value of 0-5. The same is true for the probability setting value area for work. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values of the probability setting value area. In the display of the probability setting value display device 153, 1 to 6 are displayed corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. As the probability values, different probability values are assigned to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

  FIG. 35 (b) shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability value of three levels substantially. Other than this is the same as FIG. In this way, when the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values may be made different, and design changes can be easily made.

  Note that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and, for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (work probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by the operation of the setting value change button, the order of probability values changing when the setting value change button is operated is different by changing the assignment. It becomes order. Also, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to two probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be made into four stages, and it can be any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

  FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the assignment of probability values is different. In this example, those which are setting 4 to setting 6 in FIG. 35B are setting 1 to setting 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also setting 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easy for the clerk performing the operation to grasp the probability value.

  FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which assignment of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display unit 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, only one probability value can be substantially set, and even when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control apparatus 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is made on the probability set value display device 153, but as described above, the specific display (for example, blank display) is performed, whereby the operation is performed. Workers can easily understand that they have been accepted.

  Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is six, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIG. 35 (b) or (c), the number of values of the probability setting value area may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be seven or more in order to enable setting of more stages. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

  Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be determined independently. However, when only a big hit and a small hit are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set a small hit probability value according to the big hit probability value. Further, the probability setting value for setting the jackpot probability value and the probability setting value for setting the small hitting probability value may be set separately. Also, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Furthermore, the probability of the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game may also be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

  When the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-substrate may be removed, and the sub-substrate subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control apparatus 100 with the setting sub-substrate. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and to reduce the cost. Further, in the gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out.

  The payout control device 200 in the present modification includes storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in the power-off state. The storage means is adapted to store information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and payout is performed based on the information stored therein. As described above, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout command regardless of the status of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information on the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage unit of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S51). The payout control device 200 starts the payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing this, even when the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the player's profit from being damaged. it can.

  In addition to the notification of prompting the change of the probability setting value, the effect control device 300 also notifies that there is a possibility that the payout will be performed based on the reception of the setting change instruction command. It is good. Moreover, transmitting the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above case. For example, in the case of transmitting the command in the probability setting change in FIG. Even when a command at the time of S40) and RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a command (specific information) of the payout instruction may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Based on information from the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the game control means, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effects of the game, and probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (selectable probability setting value) can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) Game control means 100), and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game media based on the payout information from the game control means; Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of holding stored contents even in the power-off state, and validity determination means (game control apparatus 100) for judging whether the information stored in the memory means at power-on is valid And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage means by the validity determination means When it is determined that the information is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means sets the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information. And the payout control means is provided with payout information storage means capable of storing the stored contents even in the power-off state, and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and the specific information When signal, and it has to perform control to pay out game media based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to urge the return to the normal state, and to prevent the player from losing the profit obtained. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information on the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. However, the initialization prompting to select the probability setting value is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value being unintended by the game arcade from being set.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, a plurality of determination conditions of the selected probability setting value are prepared.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of this modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, a definite condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether a condition for fixing the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y) ) Clears the termination waiting flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and terminates the definite condition monitoring processing.

  That is, by performing the first operation in which the operator touches the operation handle 24, a first determination condition which is a condition on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second determination condition as described later, and in this case, the second determination condition is satisfied because the first determination condition having the input from the touch switch as the condition is established. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end waiting flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second determined condition has already been started. If there is no end waiting flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

  If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

  Thereafter, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the definite condition monitoring process is ended. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing in step S457 and the subsequent steps is performed, and the fixed condition monitoring processing is ended. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after an operation of turning off the setting key switch which makes the second operation is performed, the second determination condition is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value to be used for the game. The selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area until these determination conditions are satisfied, and the information of the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded, and the original probability setting value is set.

  In the probability setting value change state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be performed constantly in the probability setting value change state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first determination condition and the second determination condition are not limited to the above-described conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second determination condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Further, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the probability setting value selected by any one of the determination conditions may be set.

  Also, although the original probability setting value is set when the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the probability setting value change state being started, and the power is shut off before the determination condition is satisfied. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance, for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value The control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control, the probability setting value to which the probability value used for drawing the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value Setting means (the game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the change switch 151), and the setting means is that one of a plurality of determination conditions is satisfied The selected probability setting value is set based on this. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value. Further, by providing a plurality of finalization conditions, the degree of freedom of work is enhanced, and work efficiency in the game arcade can be enhanced.

  Further, the setting means is configured not to set the selected probability setting value when the power is shut off before any of the plurality of determination conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Further, the plurality of determination conditions include a first determination condition and a second determination condition, and the first determination condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second determination condition is the first operation and the second determination condition. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability setting value.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the setting means does not include the setting key operation unit and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. Also, the transition conditions to the changeable state where the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), whether the setting value change switch is turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S61).

  When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and when the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. .

  If the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process of initializing the RAM and changing the set value to the probability setting value change state is shown in FIG. It transfers to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the flag is set during the probability setting value change in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

  On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), whether the setting value change switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the on state (step S64; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), stop the control and wait for the shutoff of the power supply of the gaming machine.

  When the setting value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as step S62. When the probability setting value changing in progress flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform a process of changing the probability setting value to a process of initializing the RAM and changing the probability setting value. It transfers to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value change in progress flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Migration determination processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the main process described above. In this transition determination processing, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether transition conditions are satisfied Step S73).

  In the present modification, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change state by having the attendant put the gaming balls in a predetermined order in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination processing is ended. This will shift to the probability setting value change state.

  When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75) . Then, if the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  When the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process is ended. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is ended without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing of the RAM area for game control, and the backed up data is abnormal. In this case, the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

  The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game arcade. Also, although the game ball is put in the winning area in the predetermined order of the transition condition, the predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, only the detection by the detection means may be set as the condition, or the predetermined condition (the number of times of detection, the detection interval, etc.) may be set as the predetermined condition. .

  Further, although the detection sensor of the pay area is used as the detection means used to establish the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the setting value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by detection means that the player can not freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor of a winning area.

  Also, a plurality of dip switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy transition conditions, and transition is made when the state of each dip switch is in a predetermined state A condition may be established. Alternatively, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by a password input from the keyboard. .

  Also, although the establishment of the transition condition is monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value change state only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the game machine is turned on, the power supply of the game machine is turned on. Even when the setting value change switch 151 is not turned on at the same time, establishment of the transition condition may be monitored to enable transition to the probability setting value changing state. In this case, a period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be always set based on the power on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition if the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power on. A period may be started to monitor the formation of.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. Detection setting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, special winning opening switch 38a) and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned Setting means (game control apparatus 100) which can be selected from a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) And the setting means enables selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode.Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  In addition, the game is executed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is used in the game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value The probability setting values to which a plurality of detection means (the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability value used for lottery of the game are assigned are A setting unit (game control apparatus 100) that can select from among a plurality of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) According to another aspect of the present invention, the setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the plurality of detection means detect the predetermined mode. . Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines capable of executing the task of changing the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the task of changing the probability setting value can be performed simultaneously with a plurality of gaming machines Improve.

  The setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a fixed period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

  Also, the plurality of detection means can not be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the change of the probability setting value is performed by the setting value change operation unit configured by the dip switch.

  The dip switch forming the setting value change operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three dip switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as setting value change operation units, and the state of the dip switches corresponding to each probability setting value is defined.

Probability setting value change processing
In the gaming machine of the present modification, probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and when it has changed (step S461), the value of the working probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). Thus, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value change operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. It becomes.

  By using the dip switch in this way, the task of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and at the same time, the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. In addition, since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

  Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each dip switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each dip switch, and lighted when the corresponding dip switch is ON. In addition, the confirmation LED may be turned on at all times, or may be turned on only in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  Further, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the dip switch, and may be a toggle switch, a rotary switch, etc., as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. It is good.

  Also, although the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152, transition to the probability setting value change state is enabled according to the state of the setting value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above. The probability setting value change state may be ended by the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value change operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value change operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

  In addition, when not in the probability setting value changing state, the monitoring setting process is performed to monitor whether the currently set probability setting value and the state of the setting value changing operation unit match and whether the two states match. Also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time, such as when the power is turned on or when the special view fluctuation display game is started. Also, it may be performed periodically at regular intervals. If it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, notification that abnormality has occurred may be issued, or the game may be stopped.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification is configured not to play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for making it possible to change the probability setting value is broken. .

  In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, and a probability setting value display device 153 is provided, and the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100. It is supposed to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control apparatus 100 through the connector 154. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the setting value change switch 151 here.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, so that the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the OFF state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed, and the game can be progressed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED is provided which serves as a confirmation means that enables the state of the setting key switch 152 to be visually recognized. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows the case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  As described above, the probability setting value is changed as long as the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 is the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit to be in the specific state, and the input of the specific operation information is performed. It becomes a probability setting value change state in which selection of the probability setting value is possible. In this probability setting value change state, the game can not be progressed, and by ending the probability setting value change state, the game can progress.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is detached. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

  That is, since the same state as when the probability setting value is made changeable, the specific operation information is also input in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game can not be progressed. As described above, since the specific operation information is input even when the disconnection or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when the abnormality is present. In addition, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

  Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control apparatus 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 may be directly connected without the connector 154. In addition, although the setting sub-board which constitutes the setting means having the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided separately from the game control apparatus 100, the setting key switch 152 etc. is provided in the game control apparatus 100 and the setting means May be integrated with the game control apparatus 100. In this case as well, it is possible to detect a disconnection or a connector omission between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A by the same configuration.

  Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted, but the connection is interrupted when the setting sub-substrate and the game control device 100 are interrupted. Information may be input. Also, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 etc. in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving the player a gaming value Operation control unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting the probability setting value connected to the control unit (game control apparatus 100) for performing control and the control unit and assigned a probability value to be used for lottery of the game Setting means (game control apparatus 100) capable of selecting from a plurality of probability setting values by operation of the value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state Based on the input, the specific operation information is input to the control means to enable selection of the probability setting value, and the control means proceeds with the game when the specific operation information is input. It is configured not performed, if the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, so that the specific operation information to the control means has to be entered. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

  Further, when the power is turned on in a state in which the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, it is possible to select the probability setting value. Therefore, an act of changing the probability setting value illegally can be prevented in advance.

<Character appearance fluctuation>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) is a character of the decoration special symbol Z at the start of the special view fluctuation display game as the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to execute character appearance variation (display special character variation display game of character appearance variation mode) for erasing the image Z2 and causing the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z to appear in the middle of the special pattern variation display game.

The effect control device 300 executes a variation display effect for displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game according to the execution of the special figure variation display game. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 41a provided in the central part of the display area of the display device 41.
The decorative special symbol Z displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special pattern variable display game display section 41a is, for example, at least a numeric image (numeric ) Z1 and a character image (character pattern) Z2. Further, in the decorative special symbol Z, it is possible to delete the character image Z2 leaving the numeric image Z1.
The decorative special symbol Z may be at least a numeric image Z1 and a character image Z2, and the decorative special symbol Z may be a numeric image Z1 and / or a character in addition to the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z2. A frame image displayed behind the image Z2, a frame decoration image for decorating the frame image, a character decoration image for decorating the character image Z2 (for example, an image of a weapon or item possessed by the character), a number image Z1 is emphasized May be included (for example, an effect image or the like applied around the numbers).

  In the example shown in FIG. 44 (a), in addition to the decoration special figure variation display game display section 41a, a first waiting hold display for displaying a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the unfinished first start storage. Section 41b1 and the second waiting-on-wait display portion 41b2 for displaying the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory, and the start memory during digestion (corresponds to the currently executing special view fluctuation display game To display information related to the start memory) and a small symbol relatively smaller than the decoration special symbol (identification information) variably displayed on the decoration special view variation display game display unit 41a. A small symbol variation display portion 41d to be displayed, and a number hold display portion 41e that displays the number of undivided start memories as numbers are provided.

There are two types of character appearance fluctuation: character appearance fluctuation A and character appearance fluctuation B.
FIG. 44 (b) shows an example of the flow of character appearance fluctuation A, and FIGS. 45 to 47 show an example of display on the display device 41 when character appearance fluctuation A is executed.
In the character appearance variation A, when the special figure variation display game starts (t11), the axis rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z being stopped and displayed is performed (refer to FIGS. 45 (a) and (b)). The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is erased.
Here, the axis rotation display is "a variation display mode in which the disc rotates about an axis along the radial direction". That is, in the pivoted display of the decorative special symbol Z, for example, the decorative special symbol Z (hereinafter referred to as "character over symbol") including the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z2 is drawn on the front surface, and the numeric image Z1 is included on the back surface. The virtual circular plate on which the decoration special symbol Z (hereinafter referred to as "characterless design") not drawn does not include the character image Z2 is rotated about the axis along the radial direction of the virtual circular plate. It will be.

In the axis rotation display at the time of erasing the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z, the virtual disk is half-rotated and the virtual disk is viewed from the state where the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character symbol is drawn) is visible After the state in which only the side surface of the disc is visible, it is converted to the state in which the back surface of the virtual disc (the surface on which the characterless symbol is drawn) is visible. When only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible, the character image Z2 disappears, and the characterless symbol is displayed from that point on.
In this embodiment, in the axis rotation display at the time of erasing the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z, the decoration special symbol Z (virtual disk) is half-rotated, and the character image Z2 is displayed in the middle of the axis rotation display. Although the deletion is performed, the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the deletion timing of the character image Z2 can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, axis rotation display may be performed to rotate the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) by one or more rotations, or the character image Z2 may be erased at the end of the axis rotation display.
Further, an image (a character image, an effect image, etc.) capable of suggesting a degree of expectation as a big hit may be displayed on the side surface of the virtual disk (the side surface of the decorative special symbol Z). In this way, the degree of attention of the decorative special symbol Z can be increased by displaying an image that can not be understood without watching.

On the other hand, in the axis rotation display (described later) at the time of appearance of the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z, the virtual disk is half-rotated to see the back surface of the virtual disk (surface on which the character no design is drawn) From the state, only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, and then the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character symbol is drawn) can be seen. When only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible, the character image Z2 appears, and the character-with-character symbol will be displayed after that.
In the present embodiment, in the axis rotation display at the time of causing the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z to appear, the decoration special symbol Z (virtual disk) is half rotated and the character image Z2 is displayed in the middle of the axis rotation display. Although the appearance is made, the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the appearance timing of the character image Z2 can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, axis rotation display may be performed to rotate the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) by one or more rotations, or the character image Z2 may appear at the end of the axis rotation display.

Then, when the axis rotation display is finished (t12), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (see FIG. 45 (c)). First, the decorative special symbol Z is changed at a speed that makes identification difficult High-speed fluctuation display to be displayed is performed (see FIG. 46A).
Next, when the high-speed change display is finished (t13), the low-speed change display is performed to change and display the decorative special symbol Z at a discernable speed (see FIG. 46 (b)).
Next, when the low-speed variation display is finished (t14), a temporary stop display is performed in which the decorative special symbol Z is displayed in a swinging manner at a fixed position (stop display position) (see FIG. 46C).

Next, in the middle of the temporary stop display, a concealed image Y (for example, an image simulating smoke) that conceals the decorative special symbol Z is displayed (see FIG. 47A). Since the concealed image Y gradually becomes thinner and disappears, the visibility of the back of the concealed image Y (a portion overlapping the concealed image Y among the images displayed behind the concealed image Y) is concealed. It gradually improves from the state of being blocked by the image Y and completely invisible, and eventually becomes equal to that before displaying the hidden image Y. Note that depending on the display mode of the hidden image Y, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation or the like to be a big hit. Specifically, for example, the hidden image Y in the first display mode (for example, a black hidden image or a smaller hidden image) suggests that the expectation of the game is low, and the hidden image Y in the second display mode is displayed. (For example, a red concealed image or a large concealed image) may indicate that the game has high expectation.
Next, when the concealed image Y becomes thin and the back of the concealed image Y (such as the decoration special symbol Z) becomes thin, the axis rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z being temporarily stopped is performed ( A character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears as shown in FIG. 47 (b)).

Then, when the axis rotation display is finished (t15), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed (see FIG. 47C).
In the example shown in FIG. 44 (b), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is started before the concealed image Y disappears, but it is not limited to this. For example, after the concealed image Y disappears Axis rotation display of the special symbol Z may be started.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44 (b), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is ended after the concealed image Y disappears, but it is not limited to this. For example, simultaneously with the disappearance of the concealed image Y The axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z may be ended.

FIG. 44C shows an example of the flow of character appearance fluctuation B, and FIGS. 45 and 48 show an example of display on the display device 41 when character appearance fluctuation B is executed.
In the character appearance variation B, when the special figure variation display game starts (t21), the axis rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z being stopped is performed (see FIGS. 45 (a) and (b)). The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is erased.
Then, when the axis rotation display is finished (t22), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (refer to FIG. 45 (c)). First, the decorative special symbol Z is changed at a speed that makes identification difficult High-speed fluctuation display to be displayed is performed (see FIG. 48A).
Then, when the high-speed change display is finished (t23), the low-speed change display is performed to change and display the decorative special symbol Z at a discernable speed.

Next, the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the low-speed variable display. Specifically, characters other than the decorative special symbol Z to be displayed in a stopped state are variably displayed at a low speed with a character no symbol, and the decorative special symbol Z to be displayed in a stopped state is displayed at a low speed by a character having a symbol (see FIG. 48 (b)). That is, when displaying the decorative special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 41a, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed.
Next, when the low speed fluctuation display is finished (t24), the temporary stop display in which the decorative special symbol Z is rocked at the fixed position (stop display position) is displayed for a short time than the temporary stop display in the character appearance fluctuation A.
Then, when the temporary stop display is finished (t25), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special view fluctuation display game is displayed (see FIG. 48C).

Thus, the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol Z is performed in the character appearance variation B, but the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation B is shorter than the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation A.
In the character appearance fluctuation A, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears after the end of the low speed fluctuation display, but in the character appearance fluctuation B, the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z appears in the middle of the low speed fluctuation display. Since the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation B is a short period, the effect when the character image Z2 appears during the temporary stop display (display of the effect of rotating the display of the decorative special symbol Z, the hidden image Y is displayed Can not do). Therefore, when the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears after the end of the low-speed change display in the character appearance change B, the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed without such an effect being performed, so the character suddenly There is a possibility that the player may be given a sense of incongruity in which the image Z2 is displayed, or a player may be given a misunderstanding such as notification of some information by suddenly displaying the character image Z2. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity or misunderstanding, in the character appearance fluctuation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is made to appear in the middle of the low speed fluctuation display.
In the character appearance variation B, the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol Z may not be performed.

In the case where the variation time of the special figure variation display game is long (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure variation display game is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold), the effect control device 300 displays the ornament feature corresponding to the special figure variation display game. It is possible to execute character appearance fluctuation A (character appearance fluctuation for performing long-term temporary stop display) as the figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is short (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure fluctuation display game is less than the predetermined threshold), the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game It is possible to execute character appearance fluctuation B (character appearance fluctuation that performs temporary stop display for a short period of time).
Note that the character appearance fluctuation B may be executable even when the fluctuation time is long, and the character appearance fluctuation A may be executable even when the fluctuation time is short. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is long, the character appearance fluctuation A (character appearance fluctuation for performing a temporary stop display for a long period) is a character appearance fluctuation B (a temporary period for a short time If it is easier to select than the character appearance fluctuation that performs stop display and the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game is short, the character appearance fluctuation B (character appearance fluctuation that performs temporary stop display for a short period of time) is the character appearance You may be comprised so that it may become easier to select than the fluctuation | variation A (character appearance fluctuation | variation which performs a long-term temporary stop display).

Further, it is also possible to make the selection rates of the character appearance fluctuations A and B different depending on the degree of expectation as a big hit. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot expectation is high, the character appearance fluctuation B is configured to be easily selected, and it is possible to notify that the jackpot expectation is high by displaying the character image Z2 suddenly. It is.
Also, in the case of character appearance fluctuation A, it is possible to inform of the expectation of becoming a big hit by the display mode of the concealed image Y, etc. I can not Therefore, in the case of the character appearance variation B, it is also possible to configure so as not to perform such notification, and to configure such notification as other than the display mode of the concealed image Y. For example, such notification may be performed according to the display mode (size, color, etc.) of the character image Z2 appearing in the middle of the low-speed variable display, or such notification is performed by displaying the notification image. Such notification may be performed by sound effects by the speakers 19a and 19b, or by decoration effects by the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 46.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a variable display game (decorative drawing) is performed by performing variable display and stop display of a symbol (decorative special symbol Z) in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided in the display device 41 An execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game is provided, the design is a symbol configuration including an identification image (numeric image Z1) and an erasable character image Z2, and the execution means is a variable When the display is performed, the display mode of the symbol can be converted into a low-speed change display mode in which the symbol can be identified and a high-speed change display mode in which the symbol is difficult to identify, and the display mode of the symbol is changed at high speed A change display game of the first change mode (character appearance change A) in which the display mode is converted to the low speed change display mode and then the stop display is performed after passing the temporary stop display mode, and the display mode of the symbol is displayed at high speed A variation display game (character appearance variation B) of a second variation mode in which the mode is converted to the low-speed variation display mode and then the stop display is performed after passing through the temporary stop display mode for a shorter period than the first variation mode. In the first variation mode of the variation display game, the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variation display game, and the high-speed variation display mode is executed with the symbol configuration (character no figure) not including the character image Z2. Of the variable display game by causing the character image Z2 to appear during execution of the temporary stop display mode and performing stop display with the symbol configuration (character with symbol pattern) including the character image Z2 In the second variation mode, the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variation display game, and the high-speed variation display mode is executed with the symbol configuration (character no figure) not including the character image Z2. The result of the variation display game is displayed by causing the character image Z2 to appear during execution of the low-speed variation display mode and performing stop display with a symbol configuration (character with symbols) including the character image Z2.

Therefore, in the second variation mode of the variation display game (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the low speed variation display, not after the end of the low speed variation display. Can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game.
The identification image is not limited to the numeral image Z1, and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the numeral.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution means (effect control device 300) executes the variable display game when the execution time value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is long). The first variation mode of the variation display game (character appearance variation A) is executed, and the execution time value of the variation display game is less than a predetermined threshold (when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is short), The variation display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode can be configured to be executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a variation display game (decorative special view variation display game) of a different aspect according to the execution time value of the variation display game, so the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution means (effect control device 300) performs axis rotation display of the symbol (the decoration special symbol Z) when erasing the character image Z2 and when the character image Z2 appears. And by performing at least one of displaying the concealed image Y by overlapping on the symbol (decorative special symbol Z), the identification image (numeric image Z1) included in the symbol is configured to be converted into a difficult-to-identify difficult-to-identify state can do.
With this configuration, it is possible to erase the character image Z2 and appear the character image Z2 without discomfort.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difficult-to-identify state in the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is a state in which only the side surface of the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) can be seen. Further, the difficult-to-identify state in the display of the concealed image Y is a state in which the concealed image Y is dark, that is, a state in which the decorative special symbol Z is blocked by the concealed image Y and can not be viewed at all.
In the present embodiment, only the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is performed when the character image Z2 is deleted, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z when the character image Z2 is deleted. Alternatively (or alternatively), the hidden image Y may be displayed. Moreover, in the present embodiment, both the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z and the display of the concealed image Y are performed when the character image Z2 appears, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The decorative special symbol is displayed when the character image Z2 appears. Only one of Z-axis rotational display and hidden image Y may be displayed.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a variation display game (decoration special view variation display) in which identification information (decorative special symbol Z) is variably displayed in the variation display area on the display device 41 based on establishment of predetermined conditions. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a game is executed and the result of the stop display of the identification information becomes a special result, the identification information is an identification image (numeric image Z1) and the character image Z2 are deleted, and the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variable display game, and the variable display is performed with the configuration not including the character image Z2, and temporary stop display before stop display is being performed. In the first variation mode of the variation display game (character appearance variation A) in which the character image Z2 appears and the stop display is performed with the configuration including the character image Z2, and at the start of the variation display game The character image Z2 is erased and the variable display is performed with the configuration not including the character image Z2, and when the identification information is displayed in the variable display area, the character image Z2 is made to appear, and the stop display is performed with the configuration including the character image Z2. It is possible to execute the second variation mode variation display game (character appearance variation B) to be performed.

Therefore, in the second variation mode of the variation display game (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the variation display, not after the end of the variation display, giving the player a sense of discomfort or excessive expectation. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming overwhelmed and to prevent the decline in the interest of the game.
The identification image is not limited to the numeral image Z1, and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the numeral.

<Operation promotion effect>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the effect button 25.
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment displays, as an operation promotion effect, an assembly effect for displaying a moving image simulating the completion of the effect button 25 from a plurality of components before the effective period of operation of the effect button 25; A notification to notify that it is possible to receive an operation to the effect button 25 by displaying the promotion image G1 including the button image G11 imitating the effect button 25 displayed as a result of the assembly effect during the operation effective period It is possible to execute an effect consisting of an effect.

An example of the disassembled perspective view of the effect button 25 is shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 49, the effect button 25 includes an outer lens 25a provided with a touch panel 29, a decorative member 25b, a decoration sheet 25c, an inner lens 25d, a touch substrate 25e, an LED substrate 25f, a reflector 25 g, a spring 25 h, a base 25 i, and a plurality of screws 25 j.

50 to 55 show an example of display on the display device 41 at the time of execution of the operation promotion effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the effect control device 300 displays a variation display effect that displays a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game according to the execution of the special view variation display game. Run. Then, when the predetermined timing comes, the effect control device 300 starts an assembly effect of the operation promotion effect.
In the assembling effect, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a component image imitating a component constituting the effect button 25 is displayed.

  In the example shown here, among the component images imitating the components constituting the effect button 25, the component image imitating the touch substrate 25e and the component image imitating the screws 25j are omitted. In this way, by performing the assembling effect of assembling the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts in which a part of the actual parts is omitted, the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed. It is possible to prevent cheating against That is, if the internal structure of the effect button 25 becomes clear, there is a possibility that it may encourage fraudulent acts such as tampering with the effect button 25. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clear even if the assembling effect is performed, the assembling effect does not become a factor to promote the cheating on the effect button 25. The components omitted in the assembly effect are not limited to the touch substrate 25e and the screws 25j, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Although the LED substrate 25f is actually screwed to the reflector 25g, in the example shown here, since the component image imitating the screw 25j is omitted, the LED substrate 25f includes the inner lens 25d and the reflector 25g. It can be seen as being sandwiched between In this way, by assembling the effect button 25 by assembling a part of the parts by an assembling method different from the actual method, the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed, so the effect button It becomes possible to prevent the fraudulent acts against 25. In addition, in the assembling effect, an assembling method different from the actual one is not limited to different methods such as holding and screwing, but may be, for example, different receiving parts (assembly parts) . That is, although the LED substrate 25f is actually assembled to the reflector 25g, the LED substrate 25f may be assembled to a component other than the reflector 25g in the assembling effect. In addition, the parts (assembled parts) assembled by the assembling method different from the actual one in the assembling effect are not limited to the LED substrate 25f and can be appropriately changed.

  Further, in the assembling effect, the currently set probability setting value is suggested by the display mode of at least one of the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, the part image imitating the decorative sheet 25c is decorated with "V", and the color of the part image is white. The decoration "V" is a decoration not applied to the actual decoration sheet 25c.

FIG. 52C shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the probability setting value currently set. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the part image imitating the decoration sheet 25c is decorated “V” and the color of the part image is white, it corresponds to “setting 4”. The example shown here indicates that the currently set probability setting value is “setting 4”.
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG.
Moreover, it is also possible to suggest the probability setting value currently set by the display mode of the parts image which imitated parts other than the decoration sheet 25c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, for example, a moving image that simulates the step of combining the reflector 25g, the spring 25h and the base 25i (specifically, for example, the step of assembling the spring 25h and the reflector 25g to the base 25i) Is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51A, for example, the step of combining the united component group, the LED substrate 25f, the inner lens 25d and the decorative sheet 25c (specifically, for example, the reflector 25g and the LED substrate 25f A moving image imitating the step of assembling the lens 25d and the decorative sheet 25c is displayed.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), a moving image imitating the step of combining the united parts group and the decoration member 25b (specifically, for example, the step of assembling the decoration member 25b to the base 25i) is displayed Be done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51C, for example, the united component group and the outer lens 25a are united (specifically, for example, the outer lens 25a is assembled to the reflector 25g) to complete the effect button 25. A moving image imitating a process is displayed. Thereby, a button image G11 imitating the effect button 25 is displayed.

Next, when the operation effective period starts, the effect control device 300 starts an informing effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the button image G11 and the remaining length of the operation effective period. Display a promotion image G1 including a notification image G12 to be notified (for example, a time bar image) and an instruction image G13 (for example, a character image such as “press!” Or “continuous hit!”) For instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 .
Then, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation effective period, the effect control device 300 displays the first on-hold display unit, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), for example. 41b1 and the second waiting on hold display section 41b2 among the decoration special view start memory display displayed on the suspension display section 41b2 changing the display mode of the target special figure start memory display to notify the result of the preliminary determination Perform a kind of production).

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value currently set is suggested according to the display mode of the part image among the presentation modes of the assembly effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display mode of the part image In addition, it is also possible to suggest currently set probability settings according to other aspects.
For example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested according to the number of component images to be omitted, such as the probability setting value is higher as the number of component images to be omitted is smaller.
Further, for example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by a combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating the screw 25 j may be displayed, and the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the rotation direction or rotational speed of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image (for example, an image of a spark that appears to be generated by rotation, etc.) for emphasizing that it is rotating.

Further, for example, the probability setting value may be suggested according to the number of steps appearing during the assembly effect, such as the probability setting value is higher as the number of processes appearing during the assembly effect is larger. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (c), the step of combining the base 25i and the spring 25h and the step of combining the reflector 25g are simultaneously performed, but performing these steps separately So, the number of processes appearing during assembly production increases. Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 51A, the step of uniting the LED substrate 25f, the step of uniting the inner lens 25d, and the step of uniting the decorative sheet 25c are simultaneously performed. By separately performing, the number of processes appearing during assembly production increases. Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and (c), the step of combining the decorative member 25b and the step of combining the outer lens 25a are separately performed, but by performing these steps simultaneously , The number of processes appearing during assembly production is reduced.
Further, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, and an assembly effect in which a plurality of steps are simultaneously performed in one small area is executed, and each of the plurality of steps is separately performed in the other small areas. It is also possible to configure. Specifically, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a small area A, a small area B, and a small area C (for example, the small area A is larger than the small area B or the small area C). It is also possible to execute an assembly effect in which the first step and the second step are simultaneously performed, perform the first step in the small area B, and perform the second step in the small area C. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the rendering time (execution time of assembly rendering), and to display details of the assembling method (although different from the actual assembling method), thus performing a realistic assembly rendering. It is possible to

  Also, for example, the probability setting value is lower as the number of processes not satisfying the predetermined assembling order condition among the processes appearing during the assembling effect is lower, and the setting is currently made according to the assembling order of the effect button 25 in the assembling effect. It may indicate a probability setting value. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined assembly order condition is the condition that “the parts are united in order from the back”, the assembly effect is as shown in FIG. 50 (b) → FIG. 50 (c) → FIG. 51 (a) 51 (b) →..., That is, when a process which does not satisfy the predetermined assembling order condition does not appear, and when the assembling effect is displayed as FIG. 50 (b) → FIG. 53 (a) → FIG. 51 (b) →..., That is, when a process which does not satisfy the predetermined assembling order condition appears, the assembling order of the effect button 25 in the assembling effect is different.

  In addition, the probability setting value is higher as the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a is larger, and the probability setting currently set by the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a in the completed image (that is, the button image G11 imitating the effect button 25). You may suggest a value. Specifically, for example, when FIG. 51 (c) is displayed after FIG. 51 (b), that is, when the button image G11 with the largest projection amount of the outer lens 25a is displayed, and FIG. 51 (b) The amount of protrusion of the outer lens 25a in the completed image is different from the case where FIG. 53 (b) is displayed after that, that is, when the button image G11 with the smallest amount of protrusion of the outer lens 25a is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make the internal structure of the effect button 25 not clear, that is, to conceal the exact internal structure of the effect button 25, a plurality of parts from which a part of the actual parts is omitted. The assembling effect is assembled by assembling a part of the parts by an assembling method different from the actual one and assembling the effect button 25. That is, although the assembling effect is performed in the effect mode in which some parts are omitted and the effect mode in which the assembling method is different, the assembling effect is performed only in any one effect mode among these effect modes, The exact internal structure of the effect button 25 can be concealed. Therefore, the assembly effect may be performed in any one of these effect modes. Also, by concealing the accurate internal structure of the effect button 25 by performing assembly effects in other effect modes in addition to these effect modes (or in place of a part or all of these effect modes). Is possible.

For example, an assembly presentation may be performed in which the presentation button 25 is assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual one. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which parts are different may be performed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53C, a component image imitating a component that is not actually incorporated is displayed between the component image imitating the reflector 25g and the component image imitating the spring 25h. Thus, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be made to be unclear.
Further, for example, an extra effect may be added to assemble the effect button 25, and an assembly effect may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which an extra part is added may be performed. Specifically, for example, a component image imitating an actual component (for example, a component of a substrate system (inner lens 25 d, touch substrate 25 e, LED substrate 25 f), screw 25 j, etc.) is displayed more than the actual number. Thus, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be made to be unclear. Furthermore, in this case, since the number of processes in the assembly production can be increased, it is possible to perform various setting suggestions, and the assembly production can be enhanced.
Also, for example, an assembly effect may be performed in which the effect button 25 is assembled by omitting a part of the actual process. That is, you may perform the production | presentation aspect which abbreviate | omits a one part process as another production | presentation aspect. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, the assembly effect is started from FIG. 50 (b), that is, from the state where all the component images are disassembled, but FIG. 50 (c), FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. By starting the assembling effect from 51 (b), that is, from a state in which part of the part image is united, it is possible to make the internal structure of the effect button 25 not apparent. For example, when the assembly effect is started from FIG. 50 (c), the process of combining the reflector 25g, the spring 25h and the base 25i is omitted, so the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clear.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the hold change effect is performed However, during the operation effective period, the effect to be performed when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 is not limited to the on-hold change effect, and can be appropriately changed.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the ornament that is variably displayed in the decorative special view variable display game A symbol stop effect may be performed to temporarily stop (or stop) a special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped in all of the left, middle and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special view variable display game display section 41a, but in the symbol stop effect, The decorative special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or stopped) in at least one of the left, middle and right variable display areas. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 54, a character no symbol (a decorative special symbol including a digit image but not a character image) is temporarily stopped, but the character special symbol (a decorative special symbol including a digit image and a character image) is displayed. It is also possible to display a temporary stop.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, temporary stop display (or stop display) is performed in the decorative special view variable display game A normal symbol (a decorative special symbol that constitutes a special result aspect in which a definite change state does not occur after the end of the special game state) or a definite variation that constitutes a special result aspect in which a definite change state occurs after the special game state is ended A symbol promotion effect may be performed to promote the symbol). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in all of the left, middle, and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special view variable display game display unit 41a, the normal symbol displayed as being temporarily stopped is changed to a probable symbol However, in the symbol promotion effect, the normal symbol temporarily displayed (or stopped) in at least one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas may be changed to a probable symbol.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game (the special view variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game value for the player is obtained when the result of the game becomes a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for providing a game, a player is operable, and a production operation means (production button 25) composed of a plurality of members, and a production control means (production The control device 300), and the effect control means can execute the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) for promoting the operation of the effect operation means, and a plurality of the promotion effects are performed before the operation effective period of the effect operation means Assembly effect that displays a series of effects (in the case of this embodiment, a moving image) simulating until the effect operation means is completed by the members (parts) of the above, and the result of the assembly effect during the operation effective period of the effect operation means As It consists of a notification effect that displays a promotion image G1 including an operation means image (button image G11) imitating the indicated effect operation means and notifying that it is possible to receive an operation to the effect operation means, Predetermined information can be suggested by the presentation mode of the assembly presentation.
Therefore, since a novel promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be executed, the interest of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of a game (special figure variation display game) are assigned The game control apparatus 100 can be provided so that the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested as predetermined information by the effect mode of the assembly effect (see FIG. 52C).
By configuring in this manner, since the probability setting value can be suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect).
The predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the presentation mode of the assembly effect is not limited to the probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit or the degree of expectation of reach occurrence Also good.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is a series of component member images (part images) imitating members (parts) constituting the effect operation means (effect button 25) in a predetermined order It is an effect and the result of the game is a special result as predetermined information by changing the display mode of a part of the component image in the assembly effect to a specific display mode (for example, a mode with the decoration of "super heat!") It can be configured to be able to indicate the expected degree of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit by the effect mode of the assembly effect, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect).
The predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the presentation mode of the assembly effect, is not limited to the expectation of becoming a big hit, and can be appropriately changed, for example, the probability setting value or the expectation of reach occurrence Also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is a series of combining component image (part image) imitating members (parts) constituting the effect operation means (effect button 25) in a predetermined order It is an effect and the result of the game is a special result as predetermined information by changing the display mode of a part of the component image in the assembly effect to a specific display mode (for example, a mode with the decoration of "super heat!" It can be configured to be able to indicate the expected degree of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit by the effect mode of the assembly effect, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect).
The predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the presentation mode of the assembly effect, is not limited to the expectation of becoming a big hit, and can be appropriately changed, for example, the probability setting value or the expectation of reach occurrence Also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is possible to assemble the effect operation means (effect button 25) by assembling a part of the parts by an assembling method different from the actual one in the assembling effect.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the effect operation means (effect button 25) is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed, so it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the effect operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the staging effect, the staging operation means (streaming button 25) can be assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual one.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the effect operation means (effect button 25) is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed, so it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the effect operation means.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly effect, a part of the actual steps can be omitted, and the effect operation means (effect button 25) can be assembled.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the effect operation means (effect button 25) is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed, so it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the effect operation means.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly effect, the effect operation means (effect button 25) can be assembled from a plurality of parts in which a part of actual parts is omitted.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the effect operation means (effect button 25) is not clear even if the assembly effect is performed, so it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the effect operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the promotion image G1 includes an operation means image (button image G11), an effective period notification image (notification image G12) for notifying information on an operation effective period, and a rendering operation means ( And an operation mode instruction image (instruction image G13) for instructing an operation mode of the effect button 25) (see FIG. 52A).
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute a high appealing effect (operation promoting effect), that is, an enhancing effect that effectively enhances the player's desire to operate.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a game (special view fluctuation display game) when the effect operation means (effect button 25) is operated during the operation valid period. 52 can be configured to be able to execute an effect (hold change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display (decorative image start memory display) corresponding to the start memory that becomes the execution right of) (FIG. 52 (b )reference).
By configuring in this way, an attractive benefit (hold change effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so the effect effect of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) It can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the fluctuation display of the identification information (the decoration special symbol) in each of the plurality of fluctuation display areas provided in the display device 41. Game (decorative game variation display game) is executed, and when the rendering operation means (rendering button 25) is operated during the operation effective period, identification information in at least one of the plurality of variation display areas Can be configured to be able to execute an effect (pattern stop effect) for temporarily stopping or stopping (see FIG. 54).
By configuring in this way, an attractive benefit (design stop effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so the effect effect of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) It can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the fluctuation display of the identification information (the decoration special symbol) in each of the plurality of fluctuation display areas provided in the display device 41. The identification information (temporarily stop display or stop display) is displayed in the variable display area when the game (the decoration special figure change display game) is executed and the effect operation means (effect button 25) is operated during the operation effective period. It can be configured to be able to execute an effect (pattern promotion effect) for changing the normal symbol) to more advantageous identification information (probable variation symbol) for the player (see FIG. 55).
By configuring in this way, attractive benefits (design promotion effect) are given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so the effect effect of the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) It can be enhanced.

In the assembly effect, among the components constituting the effect button 25, those which are difficult for the player to understand or which are not visible (or difficult to visually recognize) may be collected as virtual components. For example, a combination of board-based components (inner lens 25d, touch substrate 25e, and LED substrate 25f) may be replaced with virtual components. As a result, it is possible to shorten the rendering time and to prevent fraudulent acts.
Further, the suggestion of the probability setting value or the suggestion of the jackpot expectation may be performed according to the display mode of the virtual part. For example, the big hit expectation may be suggested / notified by the color of a virtual part (for example, red>green>yellow>blue> white in the order of high expectation). In addition, setting suggestion (proposition of probability setting value) may be performed according to the shape and exterior of a virtual part.

Moreover, the component image imitating the component which comprises the presentation button 25 may not be an image which reproduced the actual component realistically, and may be an image which deform | transformed the actual component. For example, the screw may not reproduce the screw thread one by one, the number of LEDs of the LED substrate 25 f may not completely reproduce, and the decorative member 25 b having a complicated shape, the reflector 25 g, The bases 25i etc. may not be reproduced completely. That is, the part image may be similar to the actual part.
Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the assembly production of the completion pattern which the production | presentation button 25 assembles completely was illustrated, the assembly production of the incomplete pattern which the production | presentation button 25 does not assemble well may be sufficient. Although the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 is performed after the assembly effect of the completed pattern, the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 may not be performed after the assembly effect of the incomplete pattern. In this case, it can be informed that the effect requiring the operation of the effect button 25 is not executed by the assembly effect of the incomplete pattern. In the assembly effect of the incomplete pattern, for example, the effect that the outer lens 25a fails without fitting properly is executed (in a state where the button image G11 is completed by assembling one more in FIG. 51B) be able to.

In addition, since the player may misunderstand that the button image G11 is completed (the operation valid period has started) during the assembly effect (for example, from the vicinity of FIG. 51 (b)), the operation Before the valid period, it may be informed that the operation valid period is not.
Specifically, for example, a notification image G12 (for example, a time bar image) for notifying of the remaining length of the operation effective period is displayed simultaneously with the start of the assembly effect, and the notification image G12 is not changed during the assembly effect ( For example, by making the contents of the time bar empty (or full) without changing it, it is possible to inform the player that it is before the operation valid period.
Alternatively, the notification image G12 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the assembly effect, and the notification image G12 notifies the remaining length of the execution time of the assembly effect in a mode different from the notification mode of notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period. It is also possible. Thus, it is possible to notify that the operation effective period is before, and to notify the time for which the assembling effect is performed, that is, the time until the operation effective period starts. When the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period is a mode for reducing the time bar, a mode different from the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period (that is, the remaining time for execution of assembly effect As the notification mode of notifying the length, for example, an embodiment of counting down time may be mentioned.

  In addition, an integrated image may be displayed in which a component image (which may be another component image) simulating the decorative member 25b and a notification image G12 for reporting the remaining length of the operation effective period are integrated. At that time, before the operation effective period, the integrated image is displayed in a display mode (for example, empty (or full) time bar and dark color) notifying that it is not the operation effective period, and integrated during the operation effective period. The display image may be displayed in a display mode (for example, time bar decrease and bright color) for notifying that the operation effective period is in progress.

In addition, in the assembly rendition, some of the parts are omitted, extra parts are added, the display mode of the part image is the setting indication mode, and the virtual parts are displayed, the virtual parts being displayed If the display mode is the expectation indication mode, etc., the player may miss, so that the display may be different depending on the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46 and the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. You may alert | report.
In addition to displaying the state in which the button image G11 is completed gradually only from one direction in the assembly effect, it may be possible to display a state in which it is assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing. For example, after displaying FIG. 51 (b), the orientation of the united parts group and the outer lens 25a is changed (changed to the direction in which the outer lens 25a is disposed above the united parts group), and then combined You may display the moving image which imitated the process of uniting the completed parts group and the outer lens 25a, and completing the production button 25. FIG. As a result, it is possible to display an image assembled from the direction close to the direction in which the player visually recognizes the effect button 25.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration.

  FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the present embodiment. A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, there is provided a guiding wall 31b which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and which forms a guiding path 31a for guiding the shot gaming ball to a predetermined position of the game area 32.

  In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 56 toward the center of the display device 41.

  Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special view 1 variation display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

  In the left portion of the center case 40, a warp passage forming member 614 for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and forming a warp passage for guiding to the stage unit 620 is attached. ing. The warp passage forming member 614 extends forward by an amount corresponding to the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is supposed to be.

  The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left playing area 32 of the center case 40, It is possible to receive game balls flowing down the game area 32. The upstream end forms an inlet of the warp channel. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path for guiding the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the upstream end, downward and to the right and then to the rear. The downstream end opens rearward, and guides the game ball to the left end of the stage unit 620.

  In the stage section 620, the game ball can roll back and forth and left and right, and both left and right sides are inclined surfaces toward the center, and a central part directly above the first start winning opening 36 protrudes upward. It is formed in W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward but is lower than the left and right ends. The gaming ball having passed through the warp flow path from the left end flows into the stage portion 620, and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball bounced below the stage unit 620 can also flow.

  In the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface that descends forward is formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the upwardly projecting central portion. Due to this inclined surface, the game ball whose flow-down force is weakened on the stage unit 620 is guided from the front end of the stage unit 620 to the game area 32 below.

  Further, in the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, a groove-like downflow passage extending in the front-rear direction and falling forward is formed in a portion to be a vertex of the upwardly projecting central portion. It is done. This flow down path is a shallow groove, and many gaming balls roll left and right without fitting into the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow-down path is guided forward and falls immediately above the first start winning opening 36 and flows into the first starting winning opening 36 with high probability.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In the lower right of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (a second start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow gaming balls to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the left, and the movable member 37b is always It is almost vertical and keeps the closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is caused to fall to the left as shown in FIG. 56 by the common power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as the drive device. The game ball can be turned to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball can easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than the open state.

  Further, two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is disposed above the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In the lower right part of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 is provided which can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game. ing. The special variation winning device 38 includes a large winning opening opened upward, and includes an opening and closing member capable of opening and closing the opening of the large winning opening. The upper part of the opening and closing member is a flow path 38d where the gaming ball can flow down because the opening and closing member forms a bottom surface, and the gaming ball can flow leftward.

  The opening and closing member always holds a closed closed state (convenient for the player) which closes the big winning opening. In this closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the flow path 38d passes over the large winning opening and flows down to the left of the special fluctuation winning device 38. Then, when the result of the special view variation display game becomes the predetermined stop display mode and becomes the special game state, the opening / closing member is moved from the flow path 38d by the big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as the drive device. The game ball having flowed back into the flow path 38d is retracted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can flow into the big winning opening. Inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  Further, at the lower right portion of the center case 40, an information display device 630 for displaying information on the special figure variation display game is provided. The information display device 630 is a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variable display game, and the second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special view change display game. A second information display unit for displaying the number of In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. The decoration special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game with the 4th design separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed with the 1st-3rd symbol with the 3rd information display part or the display device 41 A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

  The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member. The information display device 630 is provided with these six light emitting members. In addition, the information display device 630 is designed to be integrated with the surrounding design.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) so that the first start winning port 36 and the general winning port 35 can be aimed for winning, the right side game area By firing the game ball (so-called right strike), it is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the special fluctuation winning device 38, and the general winning opening 35.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game making a special figure change display game and winnings for the common view start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a common drawing variation display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. The special view 1 display (first special view change display unit) 51 for the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display The game includes a special view 2 display (second special view fluctuation display unit) 52 and various displays configured of LED lamps. The various displays include a special view 1 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 1 change display game, and a special view 2 reserve display for notifying the start memory number of the special view 2 change display game. . In addition, the round display section which displays the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variation winning device), the first gaming status display section which reports whether it is a time saving status (during general power support or specific gaming status), left A second gaming state display unit is included to notify the player of a striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) to the player among the striking (normal striking) and the right striking. In addition, the third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the common drawing fluctuation display game And a general drawing hold indicator for informing the starting memory number of the common drawing variation display game.

  In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the first special view variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the first special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 in-motion display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

  In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is ended, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the second special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

  In the common drawing indicator, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting aspect) according to the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the general drawing fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (common drawing, normal symbol) for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  The special view 1 suspension display displays the number of first start memories (first suspension number), which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The special view 2 suspension display displays the number of second start memories (second suspension number), which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The common drawing suspension display displays the number of common drawing start memories (the common drawing reservation number), which is the right to execute the common drawing variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting the plurality of light emitting units.

  When the special game mode is not in effect, the round display unit turns off all the light emitting units, and during the special game mode, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. In the case of a normal gaming state in which the time saving state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the first gaming state display portion (time shortening state informing portion) turns the lamp off and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp if the game state in which the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed game (normally hit), turns the lamp off. If the player is in the game state advantageous to the player (right strike), the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

  Next, details of the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, the gaming board 30 comprises a gaming board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 And 30 a rear component 700 to which the various members required are attached.

  The front component 600 is adapted to be attached by being fitted from the front side to an opening penetrating in the back and forth direction formed in the game board main body 80. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members such as a warp passage forming member 614 and an information display device 630 are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is formed with screw holes, screwing portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving the bosses, slits for receiving ribs, etc., so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions on the base member 610. The front component 600 can be fixed at an appropriate position with respect to the game board body.

  A restricting wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for the portion where the stage portion 620 and the warp flow passage forming member 614 are disposed. The restriction wall 613 extends forward by an amount corresponding to the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It has become. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area 32 are restricted from flowing into the center case 40, and the visibility of the display device 41 is secured and the number of game balls flowing into the stage unit 620 is limited. There is.

  The rear component 700 constituting the back surface side of the game board main body 80 has a substantially rectangular box-like rear base member 710 having a recess 711 opened forward, and the rear base member 710 has a screw hole or the like. Screws, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving the bosses, slits for receiving the ribs, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a hook-like fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is formed on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 so as to penetrate in the front and rear direction. The through holes 715 allow visual recognition of the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710.

  The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the whole of the through holes 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that an image of the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through holes 715 formed in the rear base member 710. It is done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  Inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710, a discharge flow path for gaming balls that have won in each winning opening is formed, and a discharge flow path unit 720 provided with a detection sensor for gaming balls, a plurality of board effect devices 44, and a board A decoration device 46 is provided. As the plurality of board effect devices 44, an upper movable decorative unit 210 and a lower movable decorative unit 510, which are movable effect devices that perform effects of a game by being operated, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the upper movable decoration unit 210 is disposed above the display area of the display device 41, and can be moved up and down as shown in FIG. 58 (a) from the initial state shown in FIG. The upper movable member 230 and the second upper movable member 219 which can be rotated as shown in FIG. 58 (b) from the initial state shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 57, the movable decorative unit 210 has a base member 211 attached to the rear base member 710. The base member 211 is U-shaped when viewed from the front side, and includes an upper base portion 212 disposed above the display area, and a left base portion 213 disposed leftward when viewed from the front side of the display area. , And a right base portion 214 disposed on the right side as viewed from the front side of the display area.

  At the right end portion of the left base portion 213 and at the left end portion of the right base portion 214, a guide portion 215 extending in the vertical direction is provided. The guide portion 215 guides the first upper movable member 230 in the vertical direction. The left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214 are each provided with a drive mechanism 216 for driving the first upper movable member 230 up and down. Each drive mechanism 216 has a motor as a drive source, and by driving the motor, the link member 217 can be operated to drive the first upper movable member 230 up and down.

  The link members 217 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214, respectively, and are arranged to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 217 has a pivot shaft extending at one end along the front-rear direction provided on the left base portion 213 or a rotation shaft extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the right base portion 214. It is pivotally supported by a dynamic shaft. Further, the other end of the link member 217 is slidably connected to a connecting portion 222 provided on the mounting member 239 attached to the unit base portion 221 (see FIG. 59) to which the first upper movable member 230 is attached. . Further, although not shown here, the second upper movable member 219 shown in FIG. 58B is attached to the front surface of the link member 217 so as to cover the front side of the link member 217.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the unit base portion 221 is a plate-like portion extending to the left and right, and the first upper movable member 230 is attached to the central portion. Connecting portions 222 for connecting link members are provided on the left and right of the portion of the unit base portion to which the first upper movable member 230 is attached. The connection portion 222 is an elongated hole penetrating longitudinally and longitudinally and the end portion of the link member 217 is slidably connected to the connection portion 222, and according to the operation of the link member 217 based on the driving of the motor. Thus, the unit base portion 221 operates up and down. Further, at left and right end portions of the unit base portion 221, guided portions 223 which are guided by the guide portions 215 provided on the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the first upper movable member 230 includes a light emitting unit 240 attached to the unit base portion 221. The light emitting unit 240 includes a light emitting decoration portion 256 that performs decoration by light. In addition, a drive mechanism for driving the covering member 248 provided in the light emission decoration portion 256 is provided on the top of the light emitting unit 240, and the upper cover member 255 is attached to cover the top of the drive mechanism. In addition, the light emitting unit 240 is provided with a cover member 231 which covers the outer periphery of the light emitting decorative portion 256. The cover member 231 is made of a material capable of transmitting light.

  An inner decoration member 232 and an outer decoration member 233 are disposed on the front side of the light emitting unit 240. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the inner decorative member 232 is provided with a through hole 232a at a portion facing the light emitting decorative portion 256, and the light emitting decorative portion 256 is visible through the through hole 232a as shown in FIG. It is made possible. Further, the outer decoration member 233 is disposed on the front side of the inner decoration member 232, and is decorated so as to surround the through hole 232a.

  Referring back to FIG. 60, a reflector 235 that reflects light forward is disposed behind the light emitting unit 240. The reflector 235 is provided with a through hole 235 a at a position on the left and right rear of the light emitting decorative portion 256. Behind the through hole 235a, a substrate lens 236 which is a lens member capable of transmitting light is attached so as to close the through hole 235a, and an LED having a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front side behind the substrate lens 236 A substrate 237 is disposed. Further, a substrate cover 238 is attached to the rear of the LED substrate 237.

  Further, a reflector lens 234, which is a lens member capable of transmitting light, is attached to the front of the through hole 235a. The reflector lens 234 has a function of collecting the light from the LED substrate 237 on the side of the covering member 248 (the center of the light emitting unit 240). Thereby, it is possible to decorate the light emission decoration part 256 from the back side by the light from LED. Further, the reflector lens 234 reflects light from the LED substrate 250 b (see FIG. 62) of the light emitting unit 250 provided in the light emitting decorative unit 256 to assist decoration by light emission in the light emitting decorative unit 256. Furthermore, the reflector lens 234 transmits a part of the light from the LED substrate 237 and the LED substrate 250 b and irradiates the reflector 235 and the inner decoration member 232 disposed around the light, thereby the light emitting unit 240. Has a function of scattering light to the inside so that decoration by light can be efficiently performed.

  Further, a mounting member 239 for mounting the first upper movable member 230 on the front surface of the unit base portion 221 is disposed behind the reflector 235. The reflector 235 and the light emitting unit 240 are attached to the front side of the attachment member 239. Further, the attachment member 239 is provided with a connection portion 222 to which a link member 217 for moving the first upper movable member 230 up and down is slidably connected.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the light emitting unit 240 includes a motor 241 serving as a driving source, and a motor cover 242 covering the motor 241. The drive shaft 241 a of the motor 241 is disposed to extend upward along the vertical direction, and the drive gear 243 is attached to the drive shaft 241 a. The drive gear 243 can transmit a drive force to the ring gear 245 via the driven gear 244. Further, below the driven gear 244, a bearing member 254 for supporting the driven gear 244 is disposed.

  A support member 246 rotatably supporting the ring gear is fitted to the inner peripheral portion of the ring gear 245. The support member 246 is fixed to the upper cover member 255 via a support shaft 249 inserted at the center. Further, a rotating portion 247 to which the covering member 248 is attached is attached to the ring gear 245, and the rotating portion 247 and the covering member 248 attached to the rotating portion 247 are vertically moved with the rotation of the ring gear 245. It rotates around an axis along the.

  A through hole 247 a penetrating vertically is formed at the center of the rotating portion 247, and a support shaft 249 vertically penetrates the through hole 247 a. A light emitting unit 250 is attached to a support shaft 249 penetrating below the through hole 247a. The light emitting unit 250 includes a decorative lens member 250 a that is a lens member capable of transmitting light, and an LED substrate 250 b having a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front surface is attached to the back surface side of the decorative lens member 250 a.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the light emitting decorative portion 256 constituted by the light emitting portion 250 and the covering member 248, as the covering member 248 rotates around the light emitting portion 250, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b). The light emitting unit 250 changes into a covered state in which the light emitting unit 250 can not be seen from the front, and a retracted state in which the light emitting unit 250 can be seen from the front as shown in FIGS. It is possible.

  In addition, although the covering member 248 is mainly made of a material which does not transmit light, a transmitting portion 248a which can transmit light is provided along the outline of the decorative pattern. Thus, even when the covering member 248 is positioned to cover the front side of the light emitting unit 250 as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the light from the light emitting unit 250 is transmitted through the transmitting unit 248a. It is visible and can be decorated with light even in this state. Further, the decorative pattern in the shape of the transmitting portion 248 a is projected on the cover member 231 by the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 248 a. Although the cover member 231 is made of a transparent member, by making the cover member translucent so as to scatter part of the transmitted light, the decorative pattern by the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 248a becomes more easily visible, and the decoration The effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the driving force is transmitted to the detection gear 252 for detecting that the covering member 248 is in the initial position via the ring gear 245. A light shielding plate 252 a is provided in the detection gear 252, and detection of the light shielding plate 252 a by the detection sensor 253 can detect that it is at the initial position.

  The detection sensor 253 is an optical sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are disposed to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit to output an ON signal. When the covering member 248 is in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 59A, the light shielding plate 252a is positioned between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 253 so that the output of the detection sensor 253 is turned off. It has been Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the covering member 248 operates from the initial position, the light shielding plate 252a retracts from between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 253, and the output of the detection sensor 253 turns ON. Thus, it can be detected that the covering member 248 is in the initial position.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, in the gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player, the game can be rendered by the operation The movable effect device (upper movable decorative unit 210) includes a light emitting unit 250, a covering that covers the front of the light emitting unit 250, and a covering that can be converted into a retracted state retracted from the front of the light emitting unit 250. And the covering member 248 has a transmitting portion 248a through which light from the light emitting portion 250 can be transmitted, and the light from the light emitting portion 250 is viewed through the transmitting portion 248a even in the covering state. It will be possible. Therefore, since decoration by light is always possible, the decorativeness is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the covering member 248 is configured to be capable of being converted into the covering state and the retracted state by rotating the periphery of the light emitting unit 250 around an axis passing through the center of the light emitting unit 250. Therefore, decoration by light from the light emitting unit 250 passing through the transmitting unit 248a is performed in the covered state, and decoration by direct light from the light emitting unit 250 is performed in the retracted state, and decoration by light of different taste is It becomes possible. In addition, it becomes possible to perform decoration such as a turning light, and various effects can be made to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the covering member 248 is decorated on the surface that can be viewed by the player in the covering state, and the transmitting portion 248a is provided along the decoration. Therefore, the decoration given to the covering member 248 can be made to stand out, the decorativeness is improved, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The covering member 248 may cover the entire periphery of the light emitting unit 250. Further, in this case, it is preferable to set the range of the transmitting portion 248a wider than that of the above-described embodiment. In addition, the range of the transmitting portion 248a may be different depending on the position in the circumferential direction so that the amount of light that can be visually recognized by rotation may be different, and decoration by a change in light amount may be possible.

  As an effect of operating the covering member 248, it is conceivable that rotation is started from the initial position shown in FIG. 59 (a) together with the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 at a predetermined effect on the display device 41 (at predetermined timing). However, the covering member 248 may be rotated without the light emitting unit 250 emitting light. That is, the decoration by the operation of the covering member 248 and the decoration by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 can be performed independently, and it is possible to execute an aspect in which each is performed alone and an aspect in which both are performed simultaneously. Thereby, various decoration modes can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where the light emitting unit 250 emits light while the covering member 248 is rotated and in the case where the covering member 248 starts rotating while the light emitting unit 250 emits light, for example, the appearance at the time of light emission start differs Can be given. In particular, when the light emitting unit 250 emits light in a state in which the covering member 248 is rotated, the change in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player starts earlier, and the effect of higher decorativeness is achieved.

  In addition, usually, the player is conscious of the effect display on the display device 41 and does not perform special notification, and the player hardly notices by rotating the covering member 248 without causing the light emitting unit 250 to emit light. Can be performed. That is, it can also be an effect that only the player who has seen the covering member 248 can know the operation of the covering member 248 with good timing. For example, by performing such an effect as a notification of a special result, it is possible to give the player who noticed a sense of superiority and to improve the interest of the game. Also, by giving notice of such light effects that the light emitting member 250 emits light later, a notice of the previous stage of notification (this notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 In this case, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect.

<A character article assembly production>
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, before the operation of the first upper movable member 230 (that is, as a suggestion effect that suggests the execution of a notification (this notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248) Before the execution of the notification, it is possible to execute a bonus feature assembly effect that displays a moving image imitating until the first upper movable member 230 is completed from a plurality of parts.
It is to be noted that execution of a notice (preceding notification) prior to notification (preceding notification) performed by light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and rotation of the covering member 248 and execution of falling of the first upper movable member 230 (see FIG. 58A) Before the operation of the first upper movable member 230 (that is, before the execution of the prior notification), a role that displays a moving image simulating the completion of the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts It is also possible to configure to perform object assembly rendition.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the first upper movable member 230 includes an outer decoration member 233, an inner decoration member 232, a cover member 231, a light emitting unit 240, an upper cover member 255, a reflector lens 234, a reflector And a mounting member 239, a substrate lens 236, an LED substrate 237, a substrate cover 238, and a plurality of screws (not shown).

FIGS. 63 to 64 show an example of display on the display device 41 at the time of execution of the character assembly assembling effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the effect control device 300 displays a variation display effect that displays a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game according to the execution of the special view variation display game. Run. Then, at the predetermined timing, the effect control device 300 starts the feature assembly effect.
In the character product assembling effect, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), a component image imitating a component that constitutes the first upper movable member 230 is displayed.

  In the example shown here, among the component images imitating the components constituting the first upper movable member 230, the component image imitating the light emitting unit 240 and the component image imitating the upper cover member 255 have already been merged. Further, a part image imitating the reflector lens 234 and a part image imitating the reflector 235 have already been united, and a part image imitating the substrate lens 236 and a part image imitating the LED substrate 237 and a part imitating the substrate cover 238 The images are already merged. That is, in order to start the character assembly assembling effect from a state in which a part of the part image is united, a part of the steps (ie, the step of uniting the light emitting unit 240 and the upper cover member 255, uniting the reflector lens 234 and the reflector The step of combining the substrate lens 236, the LED substrate 237, and the substrate cover 238 is omitted. As described above, by performing the character assembly assembling effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 by omitting a part of the actual process, the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 becomes clear even if the character assembly assembling effect is performed. Since it does not become, it becomes possible to prevent the fraud with respect to the 1st upper movable member 230. That is, if the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is clarified, there is a possibility that the fraudulent action such as tampering with the first upper movable member 230 may be promoted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clear even if the character assembly rendition effect is performed, the character assembly rendition promotes cheating on the first upper movable member 230. It does not become a factor. In addition, the process abbreviate | omitted in a character article assembly production is not limited to these processes, and can be changed suitably.

  Further, in the example shown here, among the parts images imitating the parts constituting the first upper movable member 230, the parts image imitating a screw is omitted. In this way, by performing the character assembly assembling effect by assembling the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts of which the actual parts are partially omitted, the inside of the first upper movable member 230 is performed even if the character assembly assembling effect is performed Since the structure is not clear, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the first upper movable member 230. In addition, the parts omitted in the character assembly assembling effect are not limited to the screws and can be appropriately changed.

  Also, although the inner decorative member 232 is actually screwed to the reflector 235, in the example shown here, since the component image imitating a screw is omitted, the inner decorative member 232 and the outer decorative member 233 It can be seen as being sandwiched by the reflector 235. In this way, by performing the character assembly assembling effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 by assembling a part of the parts by an assembling method different from the actual one, even if the character assembly assembling effect is performed, Since the internal structure is not clear, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the first upper movable member 230. In addition, in the character product assembly rendition, the assembling method different from the actual one is not limited to different methods such as clamping and screwing, and for example, as shown in FIG. The parts to be assembled may be different. Further, the part (assembled part) assembled by the assembling method different from the actual one in the character article assembling effect is not limited to the inner decoration member 232 and can be appropriately changed.

  In addition, in the bonus item assembling effect, the currently set probability setting value is suggested by the display mode of at least one of the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, the component image imitating the light emitting unit 240 is decorated to imitate the transmitting portion 248a, and the color of the component image is white.

FIG. 64 (c) shows an example of the display mode corresponding to the probability setting value currently set. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), when a part image imitating the light emitting unit 240 is decorated to imitate the transmitting part 248a and the color of the part image is white, this corresponds to "setting 2". Therefore, the example shown here suggests that the currently set probability setting value is “setting 2”.
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG.
Moreover, it is also possible to suggest the probability setting value currently set by the display mode of the component image imitating components other than the light emission unit 240.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 63C, the light emitting unit 240 (including the upper cover member 255), the reflector 235 (including the reflector lens 234), the mounting member 239, the substrate lens 236 (the LED substrate 237 and A moving image imitating the process of combining the substrate cover 238 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64A, for example, a moving image imitating the process of combining the inner decorative member 232 and the outer decorative member 233 is displayed. Although the inner decoration member 232 is actually assembled to the reflector 235, here, the receiving part (the parts to be assembled (parts to be assembled) so that the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clear even when performing the character assembly rendition ) Is different from the actual.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the cover member 231, the united parts group (light emitting unit 240 etc.) behind the cover member 231, and the united part ahead of the cover member 231 A moving image imitating a process of completing the first upper movable member 230 by combining the parts group (the outer decoration member 233 or the like) is displayed. As a result, a character image resembling the first upper movable member 230 is displayed.
After that, the effect control device 300 makes a notification (full notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248, or a notification performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 In the previous step (previous notification) or the dropping of the first upper movable member 230 (see FIG. 58A) is executed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value currently set is suggested according to the display mode of the part image among the presentation modes of the character object assembly effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display mode of the part image is changed to It is also possible (or in addition) to suggest currently set probability settings according to other aspects.
For example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested according to the number of component images to be omitted, such as the probability setting value is higher as the number of component images to be omitted is smaller.
Further, for example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by a combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating a screw may be displayed, and the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the rotation direction or rotational speed of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image (for example, an image of a spark that appears to be generated by rotation, etc.) for emphasizing that it is rotating.

Also, for example, the probability setting value is higher as the number of processes appearing during the character assembly assembling rendition is higher, etc., indicating the currently set probability setting value according to the number of processes appearing during the character assembly rendition. Also good.
In addition, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, and a character assembly assembling effect is simultaneously performed in one small area, and each of the plurality of processes is separately performed in the other small areas. It is also possible to configure it to
Also, for example, if the probability setting value is lower as the number of processes not satisfying the predetermined assembling order condition among the processes appearing during the character assembly assembling effect is lower, the assembling order of the first upper movable member 230 in the character assembly assembling effect May indicate the currently set probability setting value.
Further, as the rotation speed of the covering member 248 is faster, the probability setting value is higher, etc., and is currently set by the rotational speed of the covering member 248 in the completed image (that is, the feature image imitating the first upper movable member 230). It may indicate a probability setting value. It is also possible to indicate the currently set probability setting value based on the rotational direction of the covering member 248 in the completed image, the presence or absence of light emission of the light emitting unit 250 in the completed image, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 unclear, that is, in order to conceal the precise internal structure of the first upper movable member 230, some steps are omitted. The feature assembly effect is performed in the effect mode and the effect mode in which some parts are omitted and the assembling method is different. However, the feature assembly effect is produced in any one of these effect modes. The precise internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 can be concealed only by performing. Therefore, the feature assembly rendition may be performed in any one of these rendition modes. Moreover, in addition to these presentation modes (or in place of a part or all of these presentation modes), the inside of the first upper movable member 230 can also be corrected by performing feature assembly presentation in other presentation modes. It is possible to conceal the structure.
For example, an item assembly rendition may be performed in which the first upper movable member 230 is assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual one. That is, even when the effect mode in which the parts are different is performed as another effect mode, the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 can be made unclear.
Also, for example, an accessory assembly rendition may be performed by adding extra parts and assembling the first upper movable member 230. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which an extra part is added may be performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game (the special view variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a bonus, a rendering device (first upper movable member 230) configured by a plurality of members (parts) and performing rendering related to a game by executing a predetermined operation, and rendering The presentation control means (the presentation control device 300) capable of controlling the device is provided, and the presentation control means is a series of effects simulating until the presentation device is completed by a plurality of members before the operation of the presentation device. In the case of the embodiment, it is possible to execute an assembly effect (feature assembly effect) for displaying a moving image, and it is possible to suggest predetermined information according to the effect mode of the assembly effect.
Therefore, since it is possible to perform a novel effect before the operation of the effect device (the first upper movable member 230), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect device.
Note that the rendering device is not limited to the first upper movable member 230 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the operation unit of the lower movable decorative unit 510 (the first decorative member 550 operable in the up and down direction, the up and down direction can be operated) It may be a second decorative member 560).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of a game (special figure variation display game) are assigned The game control apparatus 100 can be provided so that the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested as predetermined information by the effect mode of the assembly effect (see FIG. 64C).
By configuring in this way, the probability setting value can be suggested by the rendering aspect of the assembly rendering (character assembly assembling rendering), so it is possible to execute a novel rendering before the operation of the rendering device (the first upper movable member 230) It is possible to enhance the interest of the rendering device.
In addition, predetermined information, that is, information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect) is not limited to the probability setting value, and can be appropriately changed. It may be the degree of expectation of

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the assembly effect (character object assembly effect) is a component image (part image) imitating a member (part) constituting the effect device (first upper movable member 230). A series of effects assembled in a predetermined order, and by changing the display mode of a part of component member images in the assembly effect to a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which a decoration of "superheat!" Is given) As information, the result of the game can be configured to be able to indicate an expected degree of special result.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect), so a novel effect is executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) It is possible to enhance the interest of the rendering device.
In addition, predetermined information, that is, information suggested by the presentation mode of assembly production (feature assembly production) is not limited to the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit, and can be appropriately changed, for example, probability setting value, reach occurrence It may be the degree of expectation of

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the assembly effect (character article assembly effect) is a component image (part image) imitating a member (part) that constitutes the effect device (first upper movable member 230). It is a series of effects synthesized in a predetermined order, and is changed by changing the display mode of a part of component member images in an assembly effect to a specific display mode (for example, a mode with a decoration of "superheat!"). As information, the result of the game can be configured to be able to indicate an expected degree of special result.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect), so a novel effect is executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) It is possible to enhance the interest of the rendering device.
In addition, predetermined information, that is, information suggested by the presentation mode of assembly production (feature assembly production) is not limited to the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit, and can be appropriately changed, for example, probability setting value, reach occurrence It may be the degree of expectation of

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembling effect (character article assembling effect), a part of the parts are assembled by an assembling method different from the actual one so as to assemble the rendering device (first upper movable member 230) It can be configured.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the rendering device (the first upper movable member 230) is not clear even if the assembly rendering (character assembly assembling rendering) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the rendering device It becomes.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembling effect (character article assembling effect), the effect device (the first upper movable member 230) is assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual one. Can.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the rendering device (the first upper movable member 230) is not clear even if the assembly rendering (character assembly assembling rendering) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the rendering device It becomes.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a part of the actual process may be omitted in the assembly effect (character article assembly effect), and the effect device (the first upper movable member 230) may be assembled. it can.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the rendering device (the first upper movable member 230) is not clear even if the assembly rendering (character assembly assembling rendering) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the rendering device It becomes.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembling effect (character article assembling effect), the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is configured to be assembled from a plurality of parts in which a part of actual parts is omitted. can do.
By configuring in this manner, the internal structure of the rendering device (the first upper movable member 230) is not clear even if the assembly rendering (character assembly assembling rendering) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the rendering device It becomes.

Note that in the role-effect assembly effect, among the components that make up the first upper movable member 230, those that are incomprehensible or invisible (or difficult to visually recognize) for the player may be grouped into virtual components. Further, at that time, the suggestion of the probability setting value or the suggestion of the jackpot expectation may be performed according to the display mode of the virtual part.
Further, the component image imitating the component that constitutes the first upper movable member 230 may not be an image that realistically reproduces an actual component, but may be an image that is a deformation of an actual component.
Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol assembling effect of the complete pattern in which the first upper movable member 230 is completely assembled is illustrated, but even if there is an incomplete rendering effect of the incomplete pattern in which the first upper movable member 230 is not assembled properly. good.
Moreover, it is also possible to display a notification image for notifying the remaining length of the execution time of the feature assembly effect. At that time, an integrated image may be displayed in which one component image and a notification image for notifying of the remaining length of the execution time of the feature assembly effect are integrated.

In addition, in the character assembly rendition, a virtual part is displayed in which a part of the part is omitted, an extra part is added, a display mode of the part image is a setting indication mode, and a virtual part is displayed. The display may be different depending on the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46 or the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, since the player may miss if the display mode of the parts is the expectation indication mode or the like. You may alert that.
In addition to displaying the state in which the feature image is gradually completed only from one direction in the feature assembly effect, it is also possible to display a state in which it is assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, the first upper movable member 230 may be configured to fall to the front of the display area where the character assembly effect is displayed. Specifically, for example, when the position shown in FIG. 58 (a) is the maximum falling position of the first upper movable member 230, the character assembly assembling effect is performed in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41, and then A pattern for dropping the first upper movable member 230 to the front of the central portion (to a position overlapping with the central portion in the back and forth direction, ie to the maximum dropping position) is performed in the upper part of the display area of the display device 41 After that, it may be possible to execute a pattern in which the first upper movable member 230 is dropped to the front of the upper part (to a position overlapping with the upper part in the front and rear direction). Thereby, the drop position of the first upper movable member 230 can be suggested, and other effects are displayed in the display area margin (display area in which no character assembly effect is performed) while the character assembly effect is being performed. The display space can be used effectively because it can be executed.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the embodiments and the modifications described above can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 25 effect button (effect operation means)
41 Display Device 100 Game Control Device (Setting Means)
230 1st upper movable member (rendering device)
300 Effect Control Device (Execution Means, Effect Control Means)
G1 promotion image G11 button image (operation means image)
G12 notification image (effective period notification image)
G13 Instruction image (Operation mode instruction image)
Y concealed image Z decoration special design (pattern)
Z1 numeric image (identification image)
Z2 character image

Claims (4)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a result of the game is a special result,
An effect device configured by a plurality of members and performing effects related to a game by executing a predetermined operation;
And an effect control unit capable of controlling the effect device.
The effect control means can execute an assembly effect displaying a series of effects simulating the completion of the effect device by the plurality of members before the operation of the effect device.
A game machine characterized in that predetermined information can be suggested by an effect mode of the assembly effect. It comprises setting means capable of setting one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested as the predetermined information according to an effect mode of the assembly effect. The assembly effect is a series of effects in which component member images imitating members constituting the effect device are assembled in a predetermined order,
By changing the display mode of a part of the component image in the assembly effect to a specific display mode, an expectation of the result of the game as the predetermined result can be suggested as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The assembly effect is a series of effects which combine component member images imitating members constituting the effect device in a predetermined order,
By changing the display mode of a part of the component image in the assembly effect to a specific display mode, an expectation of the result of the game as the predetermined result can be suggested as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images